Compositions and methods for the treatment of inflammation

ABSTRACT

The invention relates to novel resolvin compounds and pharmaceutical preparations thereof. The invention further relates to methods of treatment using the novel resolvin compounds of the invention.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims the benefit of priority to U.S. ProvisionalPatent Application No. 61/168,739, filed Apr. 13, 2009, and U.S.Provisional Patent Application No. 61/174,806, filed May 1, 2009, whichapplications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

BACKGROUND

Supplementation of dietary omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (“ω-3PUFAs”) such as eicosapentaenoic acid, a component of fish oils, mayhave beneficial effects in diseases such as arteriosclerosis, arthritis,asthma and cancer, which may be mediated by antithrombotic,immunoregulatory and anti-inflammatory responses [De Caterina, R., S.Endres, S. D. Kristensen, and E. B. Schmidt, editors. (1993). n-3 FattyAcids and Vascular Disease. Springer-Verlag, London; Lands, W. E. M.,editor. (1987). Proceedings of the AOCS Short Course on PolyunsaturatedFatty Acids and Eicosanoids. American Oil Chemists' Society, Champaign,Ill.; Iigo, M. et al. (1997) Br. J. Cancer 75:650]. The potential of ω-3PUFAs for preventative actions in cardiovascular diseases was recentlysupported by the finding that major dietary ω-3 PUFAs, such aseicosapentaenoic acid (C20:5 ω-3; EPA) and docosahexaenoic acid (C22:6ω-3; DHA), have a dramatic effect on ischemia-induced ventricularfibrillation [Billman, G. E. et al. (1999) Circulation. 99:2452].Emergence of such possible preventative and/or therapeutic actions ofω-3 PUFA supplementation in infant nutrition, cardiovascular diseases,and mental health has led to a call for recommended dietary intakes byan international workshop [Simopoulous, A. P. et al. (1999). J. Am.Coll. Nutr. 18:487]. The Gruppo Italiano per lo Studio dellaSopravvivense nell 'Infarto Miocardio (GISSI) Prevenzione trialevaluated the effects of ω-3 PUFA supplementation with 11,300 patientssurviving myocardial infarction taking ˜1 g of ω-3 PUFA daily (n=2,836)along with recommended preventive treatments including aspirin, andreported a significant benefit with a decrease in cardiovascular death[Marchioloi, R. et al. (1999). Lancet. 354:447]. However, the mechanismsunderlying the protective action of dietary ω-3 PUFAs in these studiesand other studies including those concerned with diseases of the skin,bowel, and neural tissues are not currently understood. One of the manyhypothesized elements of the mechanism(s) of action of ω-3 PUFAs is thatnaturally occurring metabolites, formed from these PUFAs, may act asmediators that provide important biological functions, but thesemetabolites may have relatively short half-lives in vivo. There remainsa need for new analogues which may have greater in vivo stability thannaturally occurring ω-3 PUFA metabolites for settings where a longerhalf-life may be advantageous.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

The present invention provides a compound of formula I,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   the stereochemistry of the carbon qq′ to carbon rr′ double bond is    cis or trans;-   the stereochemistry of the carbon ss′ to carbon tt′ double bond is    cis or trans;-   Re and Rf are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl (e.g., alkoxyacyl, aminoacyl),    aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or silyl;-   E is a branched alkoxy such as isopropoxy, isobutoxy, sec-butoxy,    tert-butoxy, 3-methylbutoxy, 2,2-dimethylpropoxy, or    1,1,2-trimethylpropoxy;-   Rh and Ri are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl;-   R₅ is selected from i-iv as follows: i) CH₂CH(R₆)CH₂, where R₆ is    hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,    fluoro, hydroxyl or alkoxy; ii) CH₂C(R₆R₇)CH₂, where R₆ and R₇ are    each independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, or    fluoro, or R₆ and R₇ are connected together to form a carbocyclic or    heterocyclic ring; iii) CH₂OCH₂, CH₂C(O)CH₂, or CH₂CH₂; or iv) R₅ is    a carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl ring; and-   R₈ and R₉ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, aryl or heteroaryl, or R₈ and R₉    are connected together to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula I is represented byformula II,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:the stereochemistry of the carbon qq′ to carbon rr′ double bond is cisor trans;the stereochemistry of the carbon ss′ to carbon tt′ double bond is cisor trans;Re, Rf, R₅, and E are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula I or II is represented byformula III,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:Re, Rf, and E are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a pharmaceuticalpreparation suitable for use in a human patient, comprising an effectiveamount of any of the compounds shown above (e.g., a compound of theinvention, such as a compound of any of formulae I-III), and one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients. In certain embodiments, thepharmaceutical preparations may be for use in treating or preventing acondition or disease as described herein. In certain embodiments, thepharmaceutical preparations have a low enough pyrogen activity to besuitable for intravenous use in a human patient.

The present invention further provides methods of treating or preventingbone metabolism, mucositis, cardiovascular disease, inflammatorydiseases, metabolic diseases, ophthalmic conditions, immune function,pulmonary conditions, gastrointestinal conditions, rheumatologicalconditions, dermatological conditions, neurological conditions, cancer,infectious conditions, degenerative conditions, gerontologicalconditions, and apoptotic conditions, reducing, preventing or reversingorgan damage, reducing and/or preventing stem cell damage and/or death,enhancing organ preservation and/or survival, or enhancing stem cellpreservation and/or survival, as described herein, comprisingadministering a compound of the invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 shows that comparable levels of compound 1003 were observed inthe aqueous humor (FIG. 1a ), the vitreous (FIG. 1b ), and the cornea(FIG. 1c ) upon topical ocular administration of compounds 1001 and 1002to rabbits.

FIG. 2 shows data from measurements of ocular discomfort on day 28 of ahuman dry eye study after topical administration of vehicle or compound1001 at dose A, B, or C.

FIG. 3 shows data from measurements of ocular discomfort on day 29(approximately one day after last treatment) of a human dry eye studyafter topical administration of vehicle or compound 1001 at dose A, B,or C.

FIG. 4 shows measurements of grittiness and dryness on day 28 of a humandry eye study after topical administration of vehicle or compound 1001at dose A, B, or C.

FIG. 5 shows the ¹H NMR spectrum for compound 1001 in CDCl₃.

FIG. 6 shows the ¹H NMR spectrum for compound 1002 in CDCl₃.

FIG. 7 shows the ¹H NMR spectrum for compound Z in D₂O.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides a compound of formula I,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   the stereochemistry of the carbon qq′ to carbon rr′ double bond is    cis or trans;-   the stereochemistry of the carbon ss′ to carbon tt′ double bond is    cis or trans;-   Re and Rf are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl (e.g., alkoxyacyl, aminoacyl),    aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or silyl, preferably from hydrogen,    acyl (e.g., alkoxyacyl, aminoacyl), aminocarbonyl, and    alkoxycarbonyl, most preferably hydrogen;-   E is a branched alkoxy such as isopropoxy, isobutoxyt, sec-butoxy,    tert-butoxy, 3-methylbutoxy, 2,2-dimethylpropoxy, or    1,1,2-trimethylpropoxy, preferably isopropoxy;-   Rh and Ri are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl, preferably hydrogen or    alkyl, most preferably hydrogen;-   R₅ is selected from i-iv as follows: i) CH₂CH(R₆)CH₂, where R₆ is    hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,    fluoro, hydroxyl or alkoxy; ii) CH₂C(R₆R₇)CH₂, where R₆ and R₇ are    each independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, or    fluoro, or R₆ and R₇ are connected together to form a carbocyclic or    heterocyclic ring; iii) CH₂OCH₂, CH₂C(O)CH₂, CH₂, or CH₂CH₂; or iv)    R₅ is a carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl ring,    preferably (CH₂)₃; and-   R₈ and R₉ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, aryl or heteroaryl, or R₈ and R₉    are connected together to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring,    preferably from hydrogen and alkyl, most preferably hydrogen.

For example, the present invention provides a compound of formula Ia,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   Re and Rf are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl (e.g., alkoxyacyl, aminoacyl),    aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or silyl, preferably from hydrogen,    acyl (e.g., alkoxyacyl, aminoacyl), aminocarbonyl, and    alkoxycarbonyl, most preferably hydrogen;-   E is a branched alkoxy such as isopropoxy, isobutoxyt, sec-butoxy,    tert-butoxy, 3-methylbutoxy, 2,2-dimethylpropoxy, or    1,1,2-trimethylpropoxy, preferably isopropoxy;-   Rh and Ri are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl, preferably hydrogen or    alkyl, most preferably hydrogen;-   R₅ is selected from i-iv as follows: i) CH₂CH(R₆)CH₂, where R₆ is    hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,    fluoro, hydroxyl or alkoxy; ii) CH₂C(R₆R₇)CH₂, where R₆ and R₇ are    each independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, or    fluoro, or R₆ and R₇ are connected together to form a carbocyclic or    heterocyclic ring; iii) CH₂OCH₂, CH₂C(O)CH₂, CH₂, or CH₂CH₂; or iv)    R₅ is a carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl ring,    preferably (CH₂)₃; and-   R₈ and R₉ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, aryl or heteroaryl, or R₈ and R₉    are connected together to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring,    preferably from hydrogen and alkyl, most preferably hydrogen.

In certain preferred embodiments of formula Ia, the stereochemistry ofthe carbons bearing —ORf and —ORe are as shown in formula Ia′,

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula I is represented byformula II,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:the stereochemistry of the carbon qq′ to carbon rr′ double bond is cisor trans;the stereochemistry of the carbon ss′ to carbon tt′ double bond is cisor trans;Re, Rf, R₅, and E are as defined above.

For example, the present invention provides a compound of formula IIa,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:Re, Rf, R₅, and E are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula I or II is represented byformula III,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:Re, Rf, and E are as defined above.

In certain embodiments of Formulae I-III, E represents O—R, where Rrepresents an alkyl group, preferably a lower alkyl group, that isbranched at the position bonded to the oxygen atom. Exemplary such Rmoieties include —CH(CH₃)₂ (isopropyl), —CH(CH₂CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)(CH₂CH₃)(sec-butyl), and —C(CH₃)₃ (tert-butyl).

Exemplary compounds of formulae I, II, and III include compound 1001

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a pharmaceuticalpreparation suitable for use in a human patient, comprising an effectiveamount of any of the compounds shown above (e.g., a compound of theinvention, such as a compound of any of formulae and one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients. In certain embodiments, thepharmaceutical preparations may be for use in treating or preventing acondition or disease as described herein. In certain embodiments, thepharmaceutical preparations have a low enough pyrogen activity to besuitable for use in a human patient.

Compounds of any of the above structures may be used in the manufactureof medicaments for the treatment of any diseases or conditions disclosedherein.

Bone Metabolism

The present invention provides methods of treating or preventing boneloss in a patient comprising administering a compound of the invention.In certain embodiments, conditions with which the bone loss isassociated include, for example, but are not limited to any one or moreof: ankylosing spondylitis, renal osteodystrophy (e.g., in patientsundergoing dialysis), osteoporosis, glucocorticoid-induced osteoporosis,Paget's disease, abnormally increased bone turnover, periodontitis,periodontal disease, bone fractures, rheumatoid arthritis,osteoarthritis, periprosthetic osteolysis, osteogenesis imperfecta,metastatic bone disease, hypercalcemia of malignancy, multiple myeloma,bone loss associated with microgravity, Langerhan's Cell Histiocytosis(LHC), bone loss associated with renal tubular disorders, or bone lossassociated with bed-ridden conditions.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingosteoporosis in a patient comprising administering a compound of theinvention. In certain embodiments, the osteoporosis is medicine-inducedosteoporosis. In certain embodiments, the medicine-induced osteoporosisis glucocorticoid-induced osteoporosis.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingdiabetic osteopenia in a patient comprising administering a compound ofthe invention.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingmetastatic bone disease in a patient comprising administering a compoundof the invention. The present invention provides a method of decreasingthe incidence of bone metastasis in a patient comprising administering acompound of the invention. The present invention further provides amethod of delaying the onset of bone metastasis in a patient comprisingadministering a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, acompound of the invention is administered conjointly with chemotherapyor radiation therapy.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingperiodontitis in a patient comprising administering a compound of theinvention.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventinggingivitis in a patient comprising administering a compound of theinvention.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingankylosing spondylitis in a patient comprising administering a compoundof the invention.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing renalosteodystrophy (e.g., in patients undergoing dialysis) in a patientcomprising administering a compound of the invention.

In one embodiment, the method of treating or preventing bone loss maycomprise administering a compound of the invention conjointly with anadditional agent useful in the treatment of bone loss. In certainembodiments, the compound of the invention may be conjointlyadministered with a bisphosphonate (e.g., ibandronate, zolendronate,risedronate, etidronate, or alendronate), a steroid, such as an anabolicsteroid (e.g., testosterone, quinbolone, oxymetholone, nandrolonehexylphenylpropionate, oxandrolone, testosterone undecanoate,mibolerone, danozol, nandrolone decanoate, trenbolonecyclohexylmethylcarbonate, methenolone acetate, methenolone enanthate,mesterolone, dihydrotestosterone, methandrostenolone, nandroloneundecanoate, boldenone undecylenate, formebolone, trenbolone acetate,fluoxymesterone, nandrolone laureate, drostanolone propionate, clostebolacetate, trestolone acetate, methandriol dipropionate,methyltestosterone, furazabol, bolasterone, norethandrolone,mepitiostane, tetrahydrogestrinone, trenbolone enanthate, andstanozolol), an estrogen (e.g., estradiol, estriol, estrone, equilin, orequilenin), a substance having estrogenic activity (e.g., xenoestrogens,phytoestrogens, or mycoestrogens), a selective estrogen receptormodulator (e.g., raloxifene), or hormone treatment (e.g., calcitonin orteriparitide). In certain embodiments, the compound of the invention maybe conjointly administered with growth factors or other therapeuticagents that have a positive effect on the growth of bone or connectivetissue, such as osteoprotegerin, interleukins, MMP inhibitors, betaglucans, integrin antagonists, calcitonin, proton pump inhibitors,protease inhibitors, insulin-like growth factor-1, platelet-derivedgrowth factor, epidermal growth factor, inhibitors of transforminggrowth factor-alpha, transforming growth factor-beta, bone morphogeneticprotein, parathyroid hormone, osteoprotegerin, a fibroblast growthfactor, Vitamin D, vitronectin, plasminogen-activator inhibitor, or aprotease inhibitor such as a metalloprotease inhibitor, or elementsknown to be beneficial to bone formation, such as calcium, fluoride,magnesium, boron, or a combination thereof.

In one embodiment, the method of treating or preventing metastatic bonedisease may comprise administering a compound of the inventionconjointly with a chemotherapeutic agent. Chemotherapeutic agents thatmay be conjointly administered with compounds of the invention include:aminoglutethimide, amsacrine, anastrozole, asparaginase, bcg,bicalutamide, bleomycin, buserelin, busulfan, campothecin, capecitabine,carboplatin, carmustine, chlorambucil, cisplatin, cladribine,clodronate, colchicine, cyclophosphamide, cyproterone, cytarabine,dacarbazine, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, dienestrol, diethylstilbestrol,docetaxel, doxorubicin, epirubicin, estradiol, estramustine, etoposide,exemestane, filgrastim, fludarabine, fludrocortisone, fluorouracil,fluoxymesterone, flutamide, gemcitabine, genistein, goserelin,hydroxyurea, idarubicin, ifosfamide, imatinib, interferon, irinotecan,ironotecan, letrozole, leucovorin, leuprolide, levamisole, lomustine,mechlorethamine, medroxyprogesterone, megestrol, melphalan,mercaptopurine, mesna, methotrexate, mitomycin, mitotane, mitoxantrone,nilutamide, nocodazole, octreotide, oxaliplatin, paclitaxel,pamidronate, pentostatin, plicamycin, porfimer, procarbazine,raltitrexed, rituximab, streptozocin, suramin, tamoxifen, temozolomide,teniposide, testosterone, thioguanine, thiotepa, titanocene dichloride,topotecan, trastuzumab, tretinoin, vinblastine, vincristine, vindesine,and vinorelbine.

Many combination therapies have been developed for the treatment ofcancer. In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with a combination therapy. Examples ofcombination therapies with which compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered are included in Table 1.

TABLE 1 Exemplary combinatorial therapies for the treatment of cancer.Name Therapeutic agents ABV Doxorubicin, Bleomycin, Vinblastine ABVDDoxorubicin, Bleomycin, Vinblastine, Dacarbazine AC (Breast)Doxorubicin, Cyclophosphamide AC (Sarcoma) Doxorubicin, Cisplatin AC(Neuroblastoma) Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin ACE Cyclophosphamide,Doxorubicin, Etoposide ACe Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin AD Doxorubicin,Dacarbazine AP Doxorubicin, Cisplatin ARAC-DNR Cytarabine, DaunorubicinB-CAVe Bleomycin, Lomustine, Doxorubicin, Vinblastine BCVPP Carmustine,Cyclophosphamide, Vinblastine, Procarbazine, Prednisone BEACOPPBleomycin, Etoposide, Doxorubicin, Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine,Procarbazine, Prednisone, Filgrastim BEP Bleomycin, Etoposide, CisplatinBIP Bleomycin, Cisplatin, Ifosfamide, Mesna BOMP Bleomycin, Vincristine,Cisplatin, Mitomycin CA Cytarabine, Asparaginase CABO Cisplatin,Methotrexate, Bleomycin, Vincristine CAF Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin,Fluorouracil CAL-G Cyclophosphamide, Daunorubicin, Vincristine,Prednisone, Asparaginase CAMP Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin,Methotrexate, Procarbazine CAP Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin, CisplatinCaT Carboplatin, Paclitaxel CAV Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin,Vincristine CAVE ADD CAV and Etoposide CA-VP16 Cyclophosphamide,Doxorubicin, Etoposide CC Cyclophosphamide, Carboplatin CDDP/VP-16Cisplatin, Etoposide CEF Cyclophosphamide, Epirubicin, FluorouracilCEPP(B) Cyclophosphamide, Etoposide, Prednisone, with orwithout/Bleomycin CEV Cyclophosphamide, Etoposide, Vincristine CFCisplatin, Fluorouracil or Carboplatin Fluorouracil CHAPCyclophosphamide or Cyclophosphamide, Altretamine, Doxorubicin,Cisplatin ChlVPP Chlorambucil, Vinblastine, Procarbazine, PrednisoneCHOP Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin, Vincristine, Prednisone CHOP-BLEOAdd Bleomycin to CHOP CISCA Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin, CisplatinCLD-BOMP Bleomycin, Cisplatin, Vincristine, Mitomycin CMF Methotrexate,Fluorouracil, Cyclophosphamide CMFP Cyclophosphamide, Methotrexate,Fluorouracil, Prednisone CMFVP Cyclophosphamide, Methotrexate,Fluorouracil, Vincristine, Prednisone CMV Cisplatin, Methotrexate,Vinblastine CNF Cyclophosphamide, Mitoxantrone, Fluorouracil CNOPCyclophosphamide, Mitoxantrone, Vincristine, Prednisone COB Cisplatin,Vincristine, Bleomycin CODE Cisplatin, Vincristine, Doxorubicin,Etoposide COMLA Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine, Methotrexate, Leucovorin,Cytarabine COMP Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine, Methotrexate, PrednisoneCooper Regimen Cyclophosphamide, Methotrexate, Fluorouracil,Vincristine, Prednisone COP Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine, PrednisoneCOPE Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine, Cisplatin, Etoposide COPPCyclophosphamide, Vincristine, Procarbazine, Prednisone CP(ChronicChlorambucil, Prednisone lymphocytic leukemia) CP (Ovarian Cancer)Cyclophosphamide, Cisplatin CT Cisplatin, Paclitaxel CVD Cisplatin,Vinblastine, Dacarbazine CVI Carboplatin, Etoposide, Ifosfamide, MesnaCVP Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine, Prednisome CVPP Lomustine,Procarbazine, Prednisone CYVADIC Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine,Doxorubicin, Dacarbazine DA Daunorubicin, Cytarabine DAT Daunorubicin,Cytarabine, Thioguanine DAV Daunorubicin, Cytarabine, Etoposide DCTDaunorubicin, Cytarabine, Thioguanine DHAP Cisplatin, Cytarabine,Dexamethasone DI Doxorubicin, Ifosfamide DTIC/Tamoxifen Dacarbazine,Tamoxifen DVP Daunorubicin, Vincristine, Prednisone EAP Etoposide,Doxorubicin, Cisplatin EC Etoposide, Carboplatin EFP Etoposie,Fluorouracil, Cisplatin ELF Etoposide, Leucovorin, Fluorouracil EMA 86Mitoxantrone, Etoposide, Cytarabine EP Etoposide, Cisplatin EVAEtoposide, Vinblastine FAC Fluorouracil, Doxorubicin, CyclophosphamideFAM Fluorouracil, Doxorubicin, Mitomycin FAMTX Methotrexate, Leucovorin,Doxorubicin FAP Fluorouracil, Doxorubicin, Cisplatin F-CL Fluorouracil,Leucovorin FEC Fluorouracil, Cyclophosphamide, Epirubicin FEDFluorouracil, Etoposide, Cisplatin FL Flutamide, Leuprolide FZFlutamide, Goserelin acetate implant HDMTX Methotrexate, LeucovorinHexa-CAF Altretamine, Cyclophosphamide, Methotrexate, Fluorouracil ICE-TIfosfamide, Carboplatin, Etoposide, Paclitaxel, Mesna IDMTX/6-MPMethotrexate, Mercaptopurine, Leucovorin IE Ifosfamide, Etoposie, MesnaIfoVP Ifosfamide, Etoposide, Mesna IPA Ifosfamide, Cisplatin,Doxorubicin M-2 Vincristine, Carmustine, Cyclophosphamide, Prednisone,Melphalan MAC-III Methotrexate, Leucovorin, Dactinomycin,Cyclophosphamide MACC Methotrexate, Doxorubicin, Cyclophosphamide,Lomustine MACOP-B Methotrexate, Leucovorin, Doxorubicin,Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine, Bleomycin, Prednisone MAID Mesna,Doxorubicin, Ifosfamide, Dacarbazine m-BACOD Bleomycin, Doxorubicin,Cyclophosphamide, Vincristine, Dexamethasone, Methotrexate, LeucovorinMBC Methotrexate, Bleomycin, Cisplatin MC Mitoxantrone, Cytarabine MFMethotrexate, Fluorouracil, Leucovorin MICE Ifosfamide, Carboplatin,Etoposide, Mesna MINE Mesna, Ifosfamide, Mitoxantrone, Etoposidemini-BEAM Carmustine, Etoposide, Cytarabine, Melphalan MOBP Bleomycin,Vincristine, Cisplatin, Mitomycin MOP Mechlorethamine, Vincristine,Procarbazine MOPP Mechlorethamine, Vincristine, Procarbazine, PrednisoneMOPP/ABV Mechlorethamine, Vincristine, Procarbazine, Prednisone,Doxorubicin, Bleomycin, Vinblastine MP (multiple Melphalan, Prednisonemyeloma) MP (prostate cancer) Mitoxantrone, Prednisone MTX/6-MOMethotrexate, Mercaptopurine MTX/6-MP/VP Methotrexate, Mercaptopurine,Vincristine, Prednisone MTX-CDDPAdr Methotrexate, Leucovorin, Cisplatin,Doxorubicin MV (breast cancer) Mitomycin, Vinblastine MV (acutemyelocytic Mitoxantrone, Etoposide leukemia) M-VAC MethotrexateVinblastine, Doxorubicin, Cisplatin MVP Mitomycin Vinblastine, CisplatinMVPP Mechlorethamine, Vinblastine, Procarbazine, Prednisone NFLMitoxantrone, Fluorouracil, Leucovorin NOVP Mitoxantrone, Vinblastine,Vincristine OPA Vincristine, Prednisone, Doxorubicin OPPA AddProcarbazine to OPA. PAC Cisplatin, Doxorubicin PAC-I Cisplatin,Doxorubicin, Cyclophosphamide PA-CI Cisplatin, Doxorubicin PCPaclitaxel, Carboplatin or Paclitaxel, Cisplatin PCV Lomustine,Procarbazine, Vincristine PE Paclitaxel, Estramustine PFL Cisplatin,Fluorouracil, Leucovorin POC Prednisone, Vincristine, Lomustine ProMACEPrednisone, Methotrexate, Leucovorin, Doxorubicin, Cyclophosphamide,Etoposide ProMACE/cytaBOM Prednisone, Doxorubicin, Cyclophosphamide,Etoposide, Cytarabine, Bleomycin, Vincristine, Methotrexate, Leucovorin,Cotrimoxazole PRoMACE/MOPP Prednisone, Doxorubicin, Cyclophosphamide,Etoposide, Mechlorethamine, Vincristine, Procarbazine, Methotrexate,Leucovorin Pt/VM Cisplatin, Teniposide PVA Prednisone, Vincristine,Asparaginase PVB Cisplatin, Vinblastine, Bleomycin PVDA Prednisone,Vincristine, Daunorubicin, Asparaginase SMF Streptozocin, Mitomycin,Fluorouracil TAD Mechlorethamine, Doxorubicin, Vinblastine, Vincristine,Bleomycin, Etoposide, Prednisone TCF Paclitaxel, Cisplatin, FluorouracilTIP Paclitaxel, Ifosfamide, Mesna, Cisplatin TTT Methotrexate,Cytarabine, Hydrocortisone Topo/CTX Cyclophosphamide, Topotecan, MesnaVAB-6 Cyclophosphamide, Dactinomycin, Vinblastine, Cisplatin, BleomycinVAC Vincristine, Dactinomycin, Cyclophosphamide VACAdr Vincristine,Cyclophosphamide, Doxorubicin, Dactinomycin, Vincristine VADVincristine, Doxorubicin, Dexamethasone VATH Vinblastine, Doxorubicin,Thiotepa, Flouxymesterone VBAP Vincristine, Carmustine, Doxorubicin,Prednisone VBCMP Vincristine, Carmustine, Melphalan, Cyclophosphamide,Prednisone VC Vinorelbine, Cisplatin VCAP Vincristine, Cyclophosphamide,Doxorubicin, Prednisone VD Vinorelbine, Doxorubicin VelP Vinblastine,Cisplatin, Ifosfamide, Mesna VIP Etoposide, Cisplatin, Ifosfamide, MesnaVM Mitomycin, Vinblastine VMCP Vincristine, Melphalan, Cyclophosphamide,Prednisone VP Etoposide, Cisplatin V-TAD Etoposide, Thioguanine,Daunorubicin, Cytarabine 5 + 2 Cytarabine, Daunorubicin, Mitoxantrone7 + 3 Cytarabine with/, Daunorubicin or Idarubicin or Mitoxantrone “8 in1” Methylprednisolone, Vincristine, Lomustine, Procarbazine,Hydroxyurea, Cisplatin, Cytarabine, Dacarbazine

In certain embodiments, a compound of the invention may be conjointlyadministered with non-chemical methods of cancer treatment. In certainembodiments, a compound of the invention may be conjointly administeredwith radiation therapy. In certain embodiments, a compound of theinvention may be conjointly administered with surgery, withthermoablation, with focused ultrasound therapy, or with cryotherapy.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment of a bone metabolism condition, such as the agents identifiedabove.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of a chemotherapeutic agent as mentionedabove; and c) instructions for the administration of the compound of theinvention and the chemotherapeutic agent.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for treating or preventing any of the        conditions discussed above, e.g., bone loss.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of bone loss (e.g., a bisphosphonate) as mentioned above. Incertain embodiments, the kit further comprises a second pharmaceuticalformulation (e.g., as one or more single dosage forms) comprising anagent suitable for the treatment or prevention of bone loss (e.g., abisphosphonate) as mentioned above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation for treating or inhibiting the development of        osteoporosis, treating or inhibiting the development of        periodontitis, treating or inhibiting the development of        metastatic bone disease, decreasing the incidence of bone        metastasis, or delaying the onset of bone metastasis.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with a chemotherapeutic agent as mentionedabove. In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises a secondpharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one or more single dosage forms)comprising a chemotherapeutic agent as mentioned above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of bone loss (e.g., a bisphosphonate) as mentioned        above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation and a second pharmaceutical        formulation comprising a compound of the invention for treating        or preventing bone loss, treating or inhibiting the development        of osteoporosis, treating or inhibiting the development of        periodontitis, treating or inhibiting the development of        metastatic bone disease, decreasing the incidence of bone        metastasis, or delaying the onset of bone metastasis.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising a chemotherapeutic agent as mentioned        above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention for        treating or preventing bone loss, treating or inhibiting the        development of osteoporosis, treating or inhibiting the        development of periodontitis, treating or inhibiting the        development of metastatic bone disease, decreasing the incidence        of bone metastasis, or delaying the onset of bone metastasis.        Mucositis

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingmucositis comprising administering a compound of the invention.Mucositis, for the purposes of this application, refers to mucosalinjury induced by or associated with the administration of radiation ordrugs (chemotherapy) for the treatment of cancer and related diseases.Mucositis typically manifests itself as ulcerations, tissue necrosis,and atrophy of the mucous membranes anywhere along the digestive tract,from the mouth to the anus. For example, the present methods may be usedto treat ulcerations and tissue necrosis associated with radiationtherapy and/or chemotherapy.

The present invention provides a method of preventing the development ofchemotherapy or radiation therapy-induced mucositis comprisingadministering a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, acompound of the invention is administered conjointly with chemotherapyor radiation therapy.

The present invention provides a method of improving survival rates byreducing the incidence of therapy-induced mucositis comprisingadministering a compound of the invention. The rate of life-threateningsevere mucositis, grade 4 on WHO scale, would be expected to be reducedfrom an average incidence of 60% in untreated patients, to 20% or lessin patents receiving a subject treatment.

In one embodiment, the method of treating or preventing mucositis maycomprise administering a compound of the invention conjointly with anadditional agent useful in the treatment of mucositis. In certainembodiments, the compound of the invention may be conjointlyadministered with an antimicrobial agent. In certain embodiments, thecompound of the invention may be conjointly administered with a growthfactor. In certain embodiments, the compound of the invention may beconjointly administered with an agent that inhibits the synthesis ofceramide, an agent that blocks the activity of ceramide, or an agentthat degrades ceramide.

In one embodiment, the method of treating or preventing mucositis maycomprise administering a compound of the invention conjointly with achemotherapeutic agent. Chemotherapeutic agents that may be conjointlyadministered with compounds of the invention include any suitablechemotherapeutic agent or combination therapy as set forth above.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of mucositis, such as the agents identifiedabove.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of a chemotherapeutic agent as mentionedabove; and c) instructions for the administration of the compound of theinvention and the chemotherapeutic agent.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation e.g., for treating or preventing mucositis,        preventing the development of chemotherapy or radiation        therapy-induced mucositis, or improving survival rates by        reducing the incidence of therapy-induced mucositis.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of mucositis (e.g., an antimicrobial agent, a growth factor,an agent that inhibits the synthesis of ceramide, an agent that blocksthe activity of ceramide, or an agent that degrades ceramide) asmentioned above. In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises asecond pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one or more single dosageforms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment of mucositis(e.g., an antimicrobial agent, a growth factor, an agent that inhibitsthe synthesis of ceramide, an agent that blocks the activity ofceramide, or an agent that degrades ceramide) as mentioned above.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with a chemotherapeutic agent as mentionedabove. In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises a secondpharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one or more single dosage forms)comprising a chemotherapeutic agent as mentioned above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of mucositis (e.g., an antimicrobial agent, a growth        factor, an agent that inhibits the synthesis of ceramide, an        agent that blocks the activity of ceramide, or an agent that        degrades ceramide) as mentioned above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing mucositis, preventing the        development of chemotherapy or radiation therapy-induced        mucositis, or improving survival rates by reducing the incidence        of therapy-induced mucositis.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising a chemotherapeutic agent as mentioned        above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing mucositis, preventing the        development of chemotherapy or radiation therapy-induced        mucositis, or improving survival rates by reducing the incidence        of therapy-induced mucositis.        Cardiovascular Disease

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingcardiovascular disease in a patient comprising administering to saidpatient a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the methodcomprises optional conjoint administration with a statin.

Cardiovascular disease refers to one or more disease states of thecardiovascular tree (including the heart). Diseases of thecardiovascular tree and diseases of dependent organs include, forexample, but are not limited to any one or more of:

disorders of the heart muscle (cardiomyopathy or myocarditis) such asidiopathic cardiomyopathy, metabolic cardiomyopathy which includesdiabetic cardiomyopathy, alcoholic cardiomyopathy, drug-inducedcardiomyopathy, ischemic cardiomyopathy, and hypertensivecardiomyopathy;atheromatous disorders of the major blood vessels (macrovasculardisease) such as the aorta, the coronary arteries, the carotid arteries,the cerebrovascular arteries, the renal arteries, the iliac arteries,the femoral arteries, and the popliteal arteries;toxic, drug-induced, and metabolic (including, but not limited to,hypertensive and/or diabetic) disorders of small blood vessels(microvascular disease) such as the retinal arterioles, the glomerulararterioles, the vasa nervorum, cardiac arterioles, and associatedcapillary beds of the eye, the kidney, the heart, and the central andperipheral nervous systems; and,plaque rupture of atheromatous lesions of major blood vessels such asthe aorta, the coronary arteries, the carotid arteries, thecerebrovascular arteries, the renal arteries, the iliac arteries, thefemoral arteries and the popliteal arteries.

Yet other disorders that may be treated with compounds of the inventioninclude restenosis, e.g., following coronary intervention, and disordersrelating to an abnormal level of high density and low densitycholesterol.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides methods oftreating a vascular disease or disorder. In certain embodiments, thevascular disorder may include any vascular disease or disorder whichcomprises an autoimmune element, for example one which is caused by anautoimmune response. Exemplary vascular disorders include one or more ofRaynaud's disease and phenomenon, anterior uveitis, vasculitis,obliterative vascular disorder, atheroma formation, arteriosclerosis,arteritis (e.g., Takayasu arteritis, temporal arteritis/giant cellarteritis), myointimal hyperplasia (natural or following angioplasty),inflammatory and autoimmune thickening of the intima and/or muscularlayer of blood vessels, inflammatory blood vessel lesions,atherosclerotic heart disease, reperfusion injury, cardiac conductiondisturbances, myocarditis, and myocardial infarction.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a method oftreating or preventing heart attack or dysrhythmia in a patientcomprising administering to said patient a compound of the invention. Incertain embodiments, the present invention provides a method ofpreventing cardiac death in a patient comprising administering to saidpatient a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the methodcomprises optional conjoint administration with a statin.

Compounds of the invention are capable of resolving inflammation.Several aspects of cardiovascular disease, in particular the formationof atherosclerotic vessel wall plaques, are believed to be intimatelyrelated to inflammation. Today it is believed that serum markers ofinflammation such as CRP may be as predictive of risk of cardiovasculardisease as elevated levels of LDL. Thus, compounds of the invention areuseful in treating or preventing cardiovascular disease. In certainembodiments, compounds of the invention are useful for the treatment orprevention of arterial inflammation and/or artherosclerosis.

Another mechanism by which compounds of the invention may be effectivein treating or preventing cardiovascular disease is by inhibiting thestructural and functional modifications of HDL that are an immediateeffect of the acute phase response commonly seen in cardiovasculardisease with active atherosclerotic vessel wall plaques. Thus, compoundsof the invention may increase HDL levels (or prevent the decrease of HDLlevels) and restore the LDL scavenging effects of HDL. This may lead toa lower and improved serum LDL/HDL ratio.

In addition to increasing HDL levels, statins also demonstrateanti-inflammatory activity which contributes to their ability to lowercardiovascular disease risk and treat cardiovascular disease. However,the full anti-inflammatory potential of statins cannot be utilizedclinically as a monotherapy due to the high doses required, which canlead to an increased rate and severity level of treatment-limitingadverse events, notably liver toxicity.

Advantageously and surprisingly, treatment or prevention ofcardiovascular disease with a combination of a statin and a compound ofthe invention leads to a mutual enhancement of both theanti-inflammatory properties and the serum HDL elevating properties ofthe two classes of compounds while avoiding the risks associated withhigh doses of statins alone.

In methods of the invention, wherein a compound of the invention isadministered conjointly with a statin (i.e., an HMG-CoA reductaseinhibitor), the statin may be chosen from any statin known in the art.Statins suitable for said conjoint administration include, but are notlimited to, mevastatin ((2S)-2-methyl butanoic acid(1S,7S,8S,8aR)-1,2,3,7,8,8a-hexahydro-7-methyl-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester), atorvastatin((βR,δR)-2-(4-fluorophenyl)-β,δ-dihydroxy-5-(1-methylethyl)-3-phenyl-4-[(phenylamino)carbonyl]-1H-Pyrrole-1-heptanoicacid), fluvastatin((3R,5S,6E)-rel-7-[3-(4-fluorophenyl)-1-(1-methylethyl)-1H-indol-2-yl]-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptenoicacid), lovastatin (2(S)-2-methyl-butanoic acid(1S,3R,7S,8S,8aR)-1,2,3,7,8,8a-hexahydro-3,7-dimethyl-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester), pravastatin((βR,δR,1S,2S,6S,8S,8aR)-1,2,6,7,8,8a-hexahydro-β,β,6-trihydroxy-2-methyl-8-[(2S)-2-methyl-1-oxobutoxy]-1-naphthaleneheptanoicacid), simvastatin (2,2-dimethyl-butanoic acid(1S,3R,7S,8S,8aR)-1,2,3,7,8,8a-hexahydro-3,7-dimethyl-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester), rosuvastatin((3R,5S,6E)-7-[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-(1-methylethyl)-2-[methyl(methylsulfonyl)amino]-5-pyrimidinyl]-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptenoicacid), eptastatin, pitavastatin((3R,5S,6E)-7-[2-cyclopropyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-3-quinolinyl]-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptenoicacid), cerivastatin((3R,5S,6E)-7-[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-5-(methoxymethyl)-2,6-bis(1-methylethyl)-3-pyridinyl]-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptenoicacid), berivastatin((R*,S*-(E)-7-(4-(4-fluorophenyl)spiro(2H-1-benzopyran-2,1′-cyclopentan)-3-yl)-3,5-dihydroxy-ethylester), dalvastatin((4R,6S)-rel-6-[(1E)-2-[2-(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)-4,4,6,6-tetramethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-yl]ethenyl]tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-,2H-Pyran-2-one), glenvastatin((4R,6S)-6-[(1E)-2-[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(1-methylethyl)-6-phenyl-3-pyridinyl]ethenyl]tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-2H-Pyran-2-one),RP 61969([2S-[2a(E),4β]]-;4-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(1-methylethyl)-3-[2-(tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl)ethenyl]-1(2H)-isoquinolinone),SDZ-265859, BMS-180431((3R,5S,6E)-rel-9,9-bis(4-fluorophenyl)-3,5-dihydroxy-8-(1-methyl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-6,8-Nonadienoicacid), CP-83101((3R,5S,6E)-rel-3,5-dihydroxy-9,9-diphenyl-6,8-Nonadienoic acid methylester), dihydromevinolin ((2S)-2-methyl-butanoic acid(1S,3S,4aR,7S,8S,8aS)-1,2,3,4,4a,7,8,8a-octahydro-3,7-dimethyl-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester), and L-669262 (2,2-dimethyl-butanoic acid(1S,7R,8R,8aR)-1,2,6,7,8,8a-hexahydro-3,7-dimethyl-6-oxo-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester).

For example, statins suitable for use in the methods of this inventioninclude statins of formula 200:

wherein

-   R₂₀₁ is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or    aralkyl;-   R₂₀₂, R₂₀₃ and R₂₀₄ are independently selected from hydrogen,    halogen, alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl;-   R₂₀₅ and R₂₀₆ are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen,    alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxy or aralkoxy;    and-   R₂₄₀ is selected from hydrogen, R₂₄₁ or M;-   R₂₄₁ is a physiologically acceptable and hydrolyzable ester group;    and-   M is a pharmaceutically acceptable cation;    or enantiomers or salts or hydrates thereof.

Other statins suitable for use in the methods of this invention includestatins of formula 201:A-Bwherein

-   A is selected from

-   B is selected from

-   C1 and C2 are joined by a single or a double bond;-   R₂₀₇ is selected from CO₂R₂₁₅, CONR₂₁₁R₂₁₂ or CH₂OR₂₁₃, or R₂₀₇ and    R₂₀₉ can form a lactone;-   R₂₁₅ is selected from H or a cationic salt moiety, or CO₂R₂₁₅ forms    a pharmaceutically acceptable ester moiety;-   R₂₀₈, R₂₀₉ and R₂₁₀ are independently selected from H, C(O)R₂₁₄ or    C(O)NR₂₁₁R₂₁₂;-   R₂₁₁ and R₂₁₂ are independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl or    alkynyl;-   R₂₁₃ is selected from H or C(O)R₂₁₄; and-   R₂₁₄ is selected from alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl.

Other statins suitable for use in the methods of this invention includestatins of formula 202:

wherein

-   R₂₂₂ is selected from

-   R₂₁₆ is selected from OH, C₆H₅CO₂ or R₂₂₁CO₂;-   R₂₂₁ is a branched or straight C₁-C₅ alkyl, C₂-C₅ alkenyl, or C₂-C₅    alkynyl;-   R₂₁₇, R₂₁₈ and R₂₁₉ are independently selected from H, C₁-C₅ alkyl,    C₂-C₅ alkenyl, C₂-C₅ alkynyl or C₁-C₅ acyl; and-   R₂₂₀ is selected from H or CH₃.

Other statins suitable for use in the methods of this invention includestatins of formula 203:

wherein

-   R₂₂₇ is —CH₂—, —CH₂—CH₇—, —CH₂—CH)—CH₂— or —CH₂—CH(CH₃)—;-   R₂₂₃ is 1-naphthyl; 2-naphthyl; cyclohexyl; norbornenyl; 2-, 3-, or    4-pyridinyl; phenyl, phenyl substituted with fluorine, chlorine,    bromine, hydroxyl; trifluoromethyl; alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl of    from one to four carbon atoms, alkoxy of from one to four carbon    atoms, or alkanoyloxy of from two to eight carbon atoms;-   Either R₂₂₄ or R₂₂₅ is —CONR₂₂₅R₂₂₉ where R₂₂₈ and R₂₂₉ are    independently hydrogen; alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl of from one to    six carbon atoms; 2-, 3-, or 4-pyridinyl; phenyl; phenyl substituted    with fluorine, chlorine, bromine, cyano, trifluoromethyl, or    carboalkoxy of from three to eight carbon atoms; and the other of    R₂₂₄ or R₂₂₅ is hydrogen; alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl of from one to    six carbon atoms; cyclopropyl; cyclobutyl; cyclopentyl; cyclohexyl;    phenyl; or phenyl substituted with fluorine, chlorine, bromine,    hydroxyl; trifluoromethyl; alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl of from one to    four carbon atoms, alkoxy of from one to four carbon atoms, or    alkanoyloxy of from two to eight carbon atoms; and-   R₂₂₆ is alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl of from one to six carbon atoms;    cyclopropyl; cyclobutyl; cyclopentyl; cyclohexyl; or    trifluoromethyl;-   or the hydroxyl acids, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts    thereof, derived from the opening of the lactone ring.

Other statins suitable for use in the methods of this invention includestatins of formula 204:

wherein

-   one of R₂₃₀ and R₂₃₁ is

-    and the other is primary or secondary C₁₋₆ alkyl, alkenyl, or    alkynyl not containing an asymmetric carbon atom, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl or    phenyl-(CH₂)_(m)—;-   R₂₃₄ is selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₃ alkyl, C₂-C₄ alkenyl, C₂-C₄    alkynyl, n-butyl, butyl, t-butyl, C₁₋₃ alkoxy, n-butoxy, i-butoxy,    trifluoromethyl, fluoro, chloro, phenoxy or benzyloxy;-   R₂₃₅ is selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₃ alkyl, C₂-C₃ alkenyl, C₂-C₃    alkynyl, C₁₋₃ alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, fluoro, chloro, phenoxy or    benzyloxy;-   R₂₃₆ is selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₂ alkyl, C₂ alkenyl, C₂ alkynyl,    C₁₋₂ alkoxy, fluoro or chloro;-   m is selected from 1, 2 or 3, with the provisos that both R₂₃₅ and    R₂₃₆ must be hydrogen when R₂₃₄ is hydrogen, R₂₃₆ must be hydrogen    when R₂₃₅ is hydrogen, not more than one of R₂₃₄ and R₂₃₅ is    trifluoromethyl, not more than one of R₂₃₄ and R₂₃₅ is phenoxy, and    not more than one of R₂₃₄ and R₂₃₅ is benzyloxy;-   R₂₃₂ is selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₃ alkyl, C₂-C₄ alkenyl, C₂-C₄    alkynyl, n-butyl, butyl, t-butyl, C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₃ alkoxy,    n-butoxy, i-butoxy, trifluoromethyl, fluoro, chloro, phenoxy or    benzyloxy;-   R₂₃₃ is selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₃ alkyl, C₂-C₃ alkenyl, alkynyl,    C₁₋₃ alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, fluoro, chloro, phenoxy or benzyloxy,    with the provisos that R₂₃₃ must be hydrogen when R₂₃₂ is hydrogen,    not more than one of R₂₃₂ and R₂₃₃ is trifluoromethyl, not more than    one of R₂₃₂ and R₂₃₃ is phenoxy, and not more than one of R₂₃₂ and    R₂₃₃ is benzyloxy;-   R₂₃₇ is selected from —(CH₂)_(n)— or —CH═CH—, wherein n is 0, 1, 2    or 3;-   R₂₃₈ is selected from

-   R₂₃₉ is selected from hydrogen, or C₁₋₃ alkyl, C₂-C₃ alkenyl, or    C₂-C₃ alkynyl;-   R₂₄₀ is selected from hydrogen, R₂₄₁ or M;-   R₂₄₁ is a physiologically acceptable and hydrolyzable ester group;    and-   M is a pharmaceutically acceptable cation.

Other statins suitable for use in the methods of this invention includestatins of formula 205:

whereinR₂₄₂ is selected from

or ring-closed lactones, salts or esters thereof.

Other statins suitable for use in the methods of this invention includestatins of formula 206:

wherein

-   R₂₄₃ is selected from H or CH₃;-   R₂₄₄ is selected from 1,1-dimethylpropyl; C₃₋₁₀cycloalkyl;    C₂₋₁₀alkenyl; C₁₋₁₀CF₃-substituted alkyl; phenyl; halophenyl;    phenyl-C₁₋₃alkyl; substituted phenyl-C₁₋₃alkyl in which the    substituent is halo, C₁₋₃alkyl or C₁₋₃alkoxy;-   the dotted lines at X, Y and Z represent possible double bonds, said    double bonds, when any are present, being either X and Z in    combination or X, Y or Z alone;-   or the corresponding dihydroxy acid of formula 206a

-   or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of said acid, a C₁₋₄alkyl    ester of said acid or a phenyldimethylamino-, or    acetylamino-substituted-C₁₋₄alkyl ester of said acid.

Other statins suitable for use in the methods of this invention includestatins of formula 207:

wherein

-   R₂₄₅ is lower alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or aralkyl, each of    which may have one or more substituents;-   R₂₄₆ and R₂₄₇ independently are selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl,    alkenyl, alkynyl, or aryl, and each of said lower alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl and aryl may have one or more substituents;-   R₂₄₈ is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or a cation capable    of forming a non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable salt;-   R₂₄₉ is sulfur, oxygen, or sulfonyl, or imino which may have a    substituent; and-   the dotted line represents the presence or absence of a double bond;    or the corresponding ring-closed lactone.

The synthesis of various statins is set forth in U.S. Pat. No. RE37,314E, U.S. Pat. No. 4,444,784, U.S. Pat. No. 4,346,227, U.S. Pat. No.5,354,772, U.S. Pat. No. 4,681,893 and US 2005/0228042.

In another embodiment, the invention provides a method of raising serumHDL concentration (or preventing a decrease in serum HDL concentration)or decreasing the serum LDL/HDL ratio in a patient, said methodcomprising administering to said patient a compound of the invention,optionally in combination with a statin. The patient to be treated inthis method may have a total serum cholesterol level of greater than 189mg/dl, preferably higher than 200 mg/dl and most preferably higher than240 mg/dl; and/or a serum LDL concentration of greater than 130 mg/dl,preferably greater than 160 mg/dl, and most preferably higher than 189mg/dl. In addition to serum cholesterol and/or LDL levels, other factorsto be considered are the presence or absence of coronary disease andrisk factors, such as age (45 or over for men, 55 or over for women),family history of coronary heart disease, smoking, high blood pressure,serum HDL cholesterol level, or presence of diabetes.

In certain embodiments, the invention provides a method of loweringtriglyceride levels in a patient, said method comprising administeringto said patient a compound of the invention, optionally in combinationwith a statin.

In certain embodiments, the patient to be treated in this method of theinvention may already be receiving a cholesterol-lowering drug. In onepreferred embodiment, the patient is already taking a statin, such asone of the statins described above; and will continue to take that drugconjointly with a compound of the invention. Alternatively, the compoundof the invention may be used as a replacement for the previouslyadministered cholesterol-lowering drug.

In a related embodiment, the invention provides a method of reducing thedose of a statin required to achieve a desired increase in serum HDL, adecrease in serum LDL/HDL ratio or serum total cholesterol level, and/ora decrease in triglyceride level. Reducing the dose of statins whilemaintaining potent serum lipid-reducing properties is highly desirabledue to side effects associated with certain statins. Well-known sideeffects include, deleterious changes in liver function, muscle pain,weakness, muscle tenderness, myopathy. Other side effects of statinsinclude reduced cognition, memory impairment, depression, irritability,non-muscle pain, peripheral neuropathy, sleep disorders, sexualdysfunction, fatigue, dizziness, swelling, shortness of breath, visionchanges, changes in temperature regulation, weight change, hunger,breast enlargement, blood sugar changes, dry skin, rashes, bloodpressure changes, nausea, upset stomach, bleeding, and ringing in earsor other noises.

In this embodiment, the dose of a statin is reduced by at least 5%, atleast 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 30%, atleast 40%, at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, or more. The actualreduction in statin dose will depend upon the nature of the compound ofthe invention being administered, the amount of compound of theinvention being administered, and the reduction in serum lipid and/ortriglyceride level desired, as well as other factors set forth elsewherein this application that are typically considered in treating a diseaseor condition. The amount of compound of the invention administered inthis method will also depend upon the factors set forth above, as wellas the nature and amount of statin being administered. In certainembodiments, the amount of compound of the invention administered inthis method is less than 5%, less than 10%, less than 15%, less than20%, less than 25%, less than 30%, less than 40%, less than 50%, lessthan 60%, less than 70%, less than 80%, or less than 90% of the dose ofcompound of the invention required to produce an anti-inflammatoryeffect. In other embodiments, the amount of compound of the inventionadministered is over 110%, over 120%, over 130%, over 140%, over 150%,over 160%, over 170%, over 180%, over 190%, or even over 200% of thedose of compound of the invention required to produce ananti-inflammatory effect.

In one embodiment, the method of treating or preventing cardiovasculardisease according to this invention may comprise the additional step ofconjointly administering to the patient another agent suitable fortreating cardiovascular disease, such as, for example, a cyclooxygenaseinhibitor, a thromboxane receptor antagonist, a prostacyclin mimetic, aphosphodiesterase inhibitor, a vasodilator, a cerebral protecting drug,a brain metabolic stimulant, an anticoagulant, an antiplatelet drug, athrombolytic drug, an antihypertensive agent, a calcium channel blocker,an antianginal drug, a diuretic, a cardioplegic solution, a cardiotonicagent, an antiarrhythmic drug, a fibrinolytic agent, a sclerosingsolution, a vasoconstrictor agent, a nitric oxide donor, a potassiumchannel blocker, a sodium channel blocker, an antihyperlipidemic drug,an immunosuppressant, or a natriuretic agent.

Examples of a cyclooxygenase inhibitor include, but are not limited to,celecoxib, rofecoxib, meloxicam, valdecoxib, aspirin or indomethacin.

An example of a thromboxane receptor antagonist is ifetroban.

Examples of vasodilators include, e.g., bencyclane, cinnarizine,citicoline, cyclandelate, cyclonicate, ebumamonine, phenoxezyl,flunarizine, ibudilast, ifenprodil, lomerizine, naphlole, nikamate,nosergoline, nimodipine, papaverine, pentifylline, nofedoline, vincamin,vinpocetine, vichizyl, pentoxifylline, prostacyclin derivatives (such asprostaglandin E1 and prostaglandin I2), an endothelin receptor blockingdrug (such as bosentan), diltiazem, nicorandil, and nitroglycerin.

Examples of the cerebral protecting drug include radical scavengers(such as edaravone, vitamin E, and vitamin C), glutamate antagonists,AMPA antagonists, kainate antagonists, NMDA antagonists, GABA agonists,growth factors, opioid antagonists, phosphatidylcholine precursors,serotonin agonists, Na⁺/Ca²⁺ channel inhibitory drugs, and K⁺ channelopening drugs.

Examples of the brain metabolic stimulants include amantadine, tiapride,and gamma-aminobutyric acid.

Examples of the anticoagulant include heparins (such as heparin sodium,heparin potassium, dalteparin sodium, dalteparin calcium, heparincalcium, parnaparin sodium, reviparin sodium, and danaparoid sodium),warfarin, enoxaparin, argatroban, batroxobin, and sodium citrate.

Examples of the antiplatelet drug include ticlopidine hydrochloride,dipyridamole, cilostazol, ethyl icosapentate, sarpogrelatehydrochloride, dilazep hydrochloride, trapidil, a nonsteroidalantiinflammatory agent (such as aspirin), beraprostsodium, iloprost, andindobufene.

Examples of the thrombolytic drug include urokinase, tissue plasminogenactivator (tPA), recombinant tPA, issue-type plasminogen activators(such as alteplase, tisokinase, nateplase, pamiteplase, monteplase, andrateplase), streptokinase, urokinase, prourokinase, anisoylatedplasminogen streptokinase activator complex (APSAC, Eminase, BeechamLaboratories), animal salivary gland plasminogen activators, andnasaruplase.

Examples of the antihypertensive drug include angiotensin convertingenzyme inhibitors (such as captopril, alacepril, lisinopril, imidapril,quinapril, temocapril, delapril, benazepril, cilazapril, trandolapril,enalapril, ceronapril, fosinopril, imadapril, mobertpril, perindopril,ramipril, spirapril, zofenopril, pentopril, randolapril and salts ofsuch compounds), angiotensin II antagonists (such as losartan,candesartan, valsartan, eprosartan, and irbesartan), calcium channelblocking drugs (such as aranidipine, efonidipine, nicardipine,bamidipine, benidipine, manidipine, cilnidipine, nisoldipine,nitrendipine, nifedipine, nilvadipine, felodipine, amlodipine,diltiazem, bepridil, clentiazem, phendilin, galopamil, mibefradil,prenylamine, semotiadil, terodiline, verapamil, cilnidipine, elgodipine,isradipine, lacidipine, lercanidipine, nimodipine, cinnarizine,flunarizine, lidoflazine, lomerizine, bencyclane, etafenone, andperhexyline), β-adrenaline receptor blocking drugs (propranolol,pindolol, indenolol, carteolol, bunitrolol, atenolol, acebutolol,metoprolol, timolol, nipradilol, penbutolol, nadolol, tilisolol,carvedilol, bisoprolol, betaxolol, celiprolol, bopindolol, bevantolol,labetalol, alprenolol, amosulalol, arotinolol, befunolol, bucumolol,bufetolol, buferalol, buprandolol, butylidine, butofilolol, carazolol,cetamolol, cloranolol, dilevalol, epanolol, levobunolol, mepindolol,metipranolol, moprolol, nadoxolol, nevibolol, oxprenolol, practol,pronetalol, sotalol, sufinalol, talindolol, tertalol, toliprolol,xybenolol, and esmolol), α-receptor blocking drugs (such as amosulalol,prazosin, terazosin, doxazosin, bunazosin, urapidil, phentolamine,arotinolol, dapiprazole, fenspiride, indoramin, labetalol, naftopidil,nicergoline, tamsulosin, tolazoline, trimazosin, and yohimbine),sympathetic nerve inhibitors (such as clonidine, guanfacine, guanabenz,methyldopa, and reserpine), hydralazine, todralazine, budralazine, andcadralazine.

Examples of the antianginal drug include nitrate drugs (such as amylnitrite, nitroglycerin, and isosorbide), β-adrenaline receptor blockingdrugs (exemplified above), calcium channel blocking drugs (exemplifiedabove) trimetazidine, dipyridamole, etafenone, dilazep, trapidil,nicorandil, enoxaparin, and aspirin.

Examples of the diuretic include thiazide diuretics (such ashydrochlorothiazide, methyclothiazide, bendrofluazide, chlorothiazide,trichlormethiazide, benzylhydrochlorothiazide, flumethiazide,hydroflumethiazide, bendroflumethiazide, methylchlorthiazide,polythiazide, benzthiazide and penflutizide), loop diuretics (such asfurosemide, etacrynic acid, bumetanide, piretanide, azosemide, andtorasemide), K⁺ sparing diuretics (spironolactone, triamterene,amiloride, and potassium canrenoate), osmotic diuretics (such asisosorbide, D-mannitol, and glycerin), nonthiazide diuretics (such asmeticrane, tripamide, chlorthalidone, and mefruside), and acetazolamide.

Examples of the cardiotonic include digitalis formulations (such asdigitoxin, digoxin, methyldigoxin, deslanoside, vesnarinone, lanatosideC, and proscillaridin), xanthine formulations (such as aminophylline,choline theophylline, diprophylline, and proxyphylline), catecholamineformulations (such as dopamine, dobutamine, and docarpamine), PDE IIIinhibitors (such as aminone, olprinone, and milrinone), denopamine,ubidecarenone, pimobendan, levosimendan, aminoethylsulfonic acid,vesnarinone, carperitide, and colforsin daropate.

Examples of the antiarrhythmic drug include ajmaline, pirmenol,procainamide, cibenzoline, disopyramide, quinidine, aprindine,mexiletine, lidocaine, phenyloin, pilsicamide, propafenone, flecamide,atenolol, acebutolol, sotalol, propranolol, metoprolol, pindolol,amiodarone, nifekalant, diltiazem, bepridil, moricizine, tocamide,encamide, propafenone, esmolol, artilide, bretylium, clofilium,isobutilide, sotalol, azimilide, dofetilide, dronedarone, ersentilide,ibutilide, tedisamil, trecetilide, digitalis, adenosine, nickelchloride, and magnesium ions and verapamil.

Examples of the antihyperlipidemic drug include atorvastatin,simvastatin, pravastatin sodium, fluvastatin sodium, clinofibrate,clofibrate, simfibrate, fenofibrate, bezafibrate, colestimide,colestyramine, mevastatin ((2S)-2-methyl butanoic acid(1S,7S,8S,8aR)-1,2,3,7,8,8a-hexahydro-7-methyl-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester), fluvastatin((3R,5S,6E)-rel-7-[3-(4-fluorophenyl)-1-(1-methylethyl)-1H-indol-2-yl]-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptenoicacid), lovastatin (2(S)-2-methyl-butanoic acid(1S,3R,7S,8S,8aR)-1,2,3,7,8,8a-hexahydro-3,7-dimethyl-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester), pravastatin((βR,δR,1S,2S,6S,8S,8aR)-1,2,6,7,8,8a-hexahydro-β,β,6-trihydroxy-2-methyl-8-[(2S)-2-methyl-1-oxobutoxy]-1-naphthaleneheptanoicacid), rosuvastatin((3R,5S,6E)-7-[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-(1-methylethyl)-2-[methyl(methylsulfonyl)amino]-5-pyrimidinyl]-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptenoicacid), eptastatin, pitavastatin((3R,5S,6E)-7-[2-cyclopropyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-3-quinolinyl]-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptenoicacid), cerivastatin((3R,5S,6E)-7-[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-5-(methoxymethyl)-2,6-bis(1-methylethyl)-3-pyridinyl]-3,5-dihydroxy-6-heptenoicacid), berivastatin((R*,S*-(E)-7-(4-(4-fluorophenyl)spiro(2H-1-benzopyran-2,1′-cyclopentan)-3-yl)-3,5-dihydroxy-ethylester), dalvastatin((4R,6S)-rel-6-[(1E)-2-[2-(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)-4,4,6,6-tetramethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-yl]ethenyl]tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-,2H-Pyran-2-one), glenvastatin((4R,6S)-6-[(1E)-2-[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(1-methylethyl)-6-phenyl-3-pyridinyl]ethenyl]tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-2H-Pyran-2-one),RP 61969([2S-[2a(E),4β]]-;4-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(1-methylethyl)-3-[2-(tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl)ethenyl]-1(2H)-isoquinolinone),SDZ-265859, BMS-180431((3R,5S,6E)-rel-9,9-bis(4-fluorophenyl)-3,5-dihydroxy-8-(1-methyl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-6,8-Nonadienoicacid), CP-83101((3R,5S,6E)-rel-3,5-dihydroxy-9,9-diphenyl-6,8-Nonadienoic acid methylester), dihydromevinolin ((2S)-2-methyl-butanoic acid(1S,3S,4aR,7S,8S,8aS)-1,2,3,4,4a,7,8,8a-octahydro-3,7-dimethyl-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester), and L-669262 (2,2-dimethyl-butanoic acid(1S,7R,8R,8aR)-1,2,6,7,8,8a-hexahydro-3,7-dimethyl-6-oxo-8-[2-[(2R,4R)-tetrahydro-4-hydroxy-6-oxo-2H-pyran-2-yl]ethyl]-1-naphthalenylester).

Examples of the immunosuppressant include azathioprine, mizoribine,cyclosporine, tacrolimus, gusperimus, and methotrexate.

In one embodiment, the method of treating or preventing cardiovasculardisease according to this invention may comprise administering acompound of the invention conjointly with non-chemical means for thetreatment or prevention of cardiovascular disease, such as part of aregimen including physical intervention (e.g., percutaneous transluminalcoronary angioplasty, coronary surgery, or vascular surgery). In certainsuch embodiments, the regimen including physical intervention mayfurther include conjointly administering another agent suitable for thetreatment or prevention of cardiovascular disease, such as the agentslisted above.

It should be understood that the methods of treatment or prevention ofcardiovascular disease according to this invention may includeconjointly administering one or more of the above agents either as aseparate dosage form or as part of a composition that also comprises astatin, a compound of the invention, and optionally further comprising astatin. Moreover, the use of a composition comprising both a statin anda compound of the invention according to this invention in the treatmentof cardiovascular disease, does not preclude the separate but conjointadministration of another statin.

The method of increasing serum HDL concentration, reducing serum LDL/HDLratio, reducing total serum cholesterol concentration, and/or loweringthe triglyceride level in a patient according to this invention mayadditionally comprise administering to said patient another activeingredient other than a statin. Such additional active ingredient may beselected from a non-statin cholesterol lowering reagent, such as bileacid sequestrants (colesevelam, cholestyramine and colestipol), niacin,fibrates (gemfibrozil, probucol and clofibrate).

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of cardiovascular disease, such as the agentsidentified above.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the        invention;    -   b) one or more single dosage forms of a statin as mentioned        above; and    -   c) instructions for the administration of the compound of the        invention and the statin.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation e.g., for treating or preventing cardiovascular        disease, raising serum HDL concentration (or preventing a        decrease in serum HDL concentration), decreasing the serum        LDL/HDL ratio, and/or lowering triglyceride levels.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for treating orpreventing cardiovascular disease, raising serum HDL concentration (orpreventing a decrease in serum HDL concentration), decreasing the serumLDL/HDL ratio, and/or lowering triglyceride levels (e.g., a statin oranother agent suitable for treating cardiovascular disease, such as, forexample, a cyclooxygenase inhibitor, a thromboxane receptor antagonist,a prostacyclin mimetic, a phosphodiesterase inhibitor, a vasodilator, acerebral protecting drug, a brain metabolic stimulant, an anticoagulant,an antiplatelet drug, a thrombolytic drug, an antihypertensive agent, acalcium channel blocker, an antianginal drug, a diuretic, a cardioplegicsolution, a cardiotonic agent, an antiarrhythmic drug, a fibrinolyticagent, a sclerosing solution, a vasoconstrictor agent, a nitric oxidedonor, a potassium channel blocker, a sodium channel blocker, anantihyperlipidemic drug, an immunosuppressant, or a natriuretic agent)as mentioned above. In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises asecond pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one or more single dosageforms) comprising an agent suitable for treating or preventingcardiovascular disease, raising serum HDL concentration (or preventing adecrease in serum HDL concentration), decreasing the serum LDL/HDLratio, and/or lowering triglyceride levels (e.g., a statin or anotheragent suitable for treating cardiovascular disease, such as, forexample, a cyclooxygenase inhibitor, a thromboxane receptor antagonist,a prostacyclin mimetic, a phosphodiesterase inhibitor, a vasodilator, acerebral protecting drug, a brain metabolic stimulant, an anticoagulant,an antiplatelet drug, a thrombolytic drug, an antihypertensive agent, acalcium channel blocker, an antianginal drug, a diuretic, a cardioplegicsolution, a cardiotonic agent, an antiarrhythmic drug, a fibrinolyticagent, a sclerosing solution, a vasoconstrictor agent, a nitric oxidedonor, a potassium channel blocker, a sodium channel blocker, anantihyperlipidemic drug, an immunosuppressant, or a natriuretic agent)as mentioned above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for treating or        preventing cardiovascular disease, raising serum HDL        concentration (or preventing a decrease in serum HDL        concentration), decreasing the serum LDL/HDL ratio, and/or        lowering triglyceride levels (e.g., a statin or another agent        suitable for treating cardiovascular disease, such as, for        example, a cyclooxygenase inhibitor, a thromboxane receptor        antagonist, a prostacyclin mimetic, a phosphodiesterase        inhibitor, a vasodilator, a cerebral protecting drug, a brain        metabolic stimulant, an anticoagulant, an antiplatelet drug, a        thrombolytic drug, an antihypertensive agent, a calcium channel        blocker, an antianginal drug, a diuretic, a cardioplegic        solution, a cardiotonic agent, an antiarrhythmic drug, a        fibrinolytic agent, a sclerosing solution, a vasoconstrictor        agent, a nitric oxide donor, a potassium channel blocker, a        sodium channel blocker, an antihyperlipidemic drug, an        immunosuppressant, or a natriuretic agent); and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing cardiovascular disease, raising        serum HDL concentration (or preventing a decrease in serum HDL        concentration), decreasing the serum LDL/HDL ratio, and/or        lowering triglyceride levels.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising a statin as mentioned above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing cardiovascular disease, raising        serum HDL concentration (or preventing a decrease in serum HDL        concentration), decreasing the serum LDL/HDL ratio, and/or        lowering triglyceride levels.        General Inflammatory Diseases

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventinginflammatory disease in a patient comprising administering to saidpatient a compound of the invention.

Examples of inflammatory conditions, which may be treated or preventedby the administration of a compound of the invention include, but arenot limited to, inflammation of the lungs, joints, connective tissue,eyes, nose, bowel, kidney, liver, skin, central nervous system, vascularsystem and heart. In certain embodiments, inflammatory conditions whichmay be treated by the current invention include inflammation due to theinfiltration of leukocytes or other immune effector cells into affectedtissue. Other relevant examples of inflammatory conditions which may betreated by the present invention include inflammation caused byinfectious agents, including, but not limited to, viruses, bacteriafungi and parasites.

Inflammatory lung conditions include, but are not limited to, asthma,adult respiratory distress syndrome, bronchitis, pulmonary inflammation,pulmonary fibrosis, and cystic fibrosis (which may additionally oralternatively involve the gastro-intestinal tract or other tissue(s)).Inflammatory joint conditions include rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoidspondylitis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, goutyarthritis and other arthritic conditions. Eye diseases with aninflammatory component include, but are not limited to, uveitis(including iritis), conjunctivitis, scleritis, keratoconjunctivitissicca, and retinal diseases, including, but not limited to, diabeticretinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, retinitis pigmentosa, and dryand wet age-related macular degeneration. Inflammatory bowel conditionsinclude Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis and distal proctitis.

Inflammatory skin diseases include, but are not limited to, conditionsassociated with cell proliferation, such as psoriasis, eczema anddermatitis, (e.g., eczematous dermatitides, topic and seborrheicdermatitis, allergic or irritant contact dermatitis, eczema craquelee,photoallergic dermatitis, phototoxic dermatitis, phytophotodermatitis,radiation dermatitis, and stasis dermatitis). Other inflammatory skindiseases include, but are not limited to, scleroderma, ulcers anderosions resulting from trauma, burns, bullous disorders, or ischemia ofthe skin or mucous membranes, several forms of ichthyoses, epidermolysisbullosae, hypertrophic scars, keloids, cutaneous changes of intrinsicaging, photoaging, frictional blistering caused by mechanical shearingof the skin and cutaneous atrophy resulting from the topical use ofcorticosteroids. Additional inflammatory skin conditions includeinflammation of mucous membranes, such as cheilitis, chapped lips, nasalirritation, mucositis and vulvovaginitis.

Inflammatory disorders of the endocrine system include, but are notlimited to, autoimmune thyroiditis (Hashimoto's disease), Type Idiabetes, and acute and chronic inflammation of the adrenal cortex.Inflammatory conditions of the cardiovascular system include, but arenot limited to, coronary infarct damage, peripheral vascular disease,myocarditis, vasculitis, revascularization of stenosis,artherosclerosis, and vascular disease associated with Type II diabetes.

Inflammatory condition of the kidney include, but are not limited to,glomerulonephritis, interstitial nephritis, lupus nephritis, nephritissecondary to Wegener's disease, acute renal failure secondary to acutenephritis, Goodpasture's syndrome, post-obstructive syndrome and tubularischemia.

Inflammatory conditions of the liver include, but are not limited to,hepatitis (arising from viral infection, autoimmune responses, drugtreatments, toxins, environmental agents, or as a secondary consequenceof a primary disorder), biliary atresia, primary biliary cirrhosis andprimary sclerosing cholangitis.

Inflammatory conditions of the central nervous system include, but arenot limited to, multiple sclerosis and neurodegenerative diseases suchas Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, or dementia associated withHIV infection.

Other inflammatory conditions include periodontal disease, tissuenecrosis in chronic inflammation, endotoxin shock, smooth muscleproliferation disorders, graft versus host disease, tissue damagefollowing ischemia reperfusion injury, and tissue rejection followingtransplant surgery.

The present invention further provides a method of treating orpreventing inflammation associated with post-surgical wound healing in apatient comprising administering to said patient a compound of theinvention.

It should be noted that compounds of the current invention may be usedto treat or prevent any disease which has an inflammatory component,such as those diseases cited above. Further, the inflammatory conditionscited above are meant to be exemplary rather than exhaustive.

Those skilled in the art would recognize that additional inflammatoryconditions (e.g., systemic or local immune imbalance or dysfunction dueto an injury, an insult, infection, inherited disorder, or anenvironmental intoxicant or perturbant to the subject's physiology) maybe treated or prevented by compounds of the current invention. Thus, themethods of the current invention may be used to treat or prevent anydisease which has an inflammatory component, including, but not limitedto, those diseases cited above.

The present invention also provides methods for treating or preventingarthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, uveitis, ocular inflammation,asthma, pulmonary inflammation, cystic fibrosis, psoriasis, arterialinflammation, cardiovascular diseases, multiple sclerosis, orneurodegenerative disease by administering an effective amount of acompound of the invention.

The present invention also provides methods for treating ischemia byadministering an effective amount of a compound of the invention. Incertain embodiments, the ischemia is cardiac ischemia, cerebralischemia, bowel ischemia (e.g., ischemic colitis or mesentericischemia), or cutaneous ischemia.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventinginflammatory disease in a patient comprising administering to saidpatient a compound of the invention conjointly with a glucocorticoid.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing aninflammatory condition (e.g., any of the inflammatory conditionsdescribed above) comprising administering to said patient a compound ofthe invention conjointly with a glucocorticoid.

Compounds of the invention are capable of resolving inflammation.Glucocorticoids are also known for their role in treating inflammation.However, the full anti-inflammatory potential of glucocorticoids isoften clinically constrained as a monotherapy due to the rate andseverity of treatment-limiting adverse events that accompany high orprolonged dosing regimens. For example, the administration ofglucocorticoids can result in side effects that mimic Cushing's disease.These side effects and others associated with glucocorticoid use includeincreased appetite and weight gain, deposits of fat in the chest, face,upper back, and stomach, water and salt retention leading to swellingand edema, high blood pressure, diabetes, slow healing of wounds,osteoporosis, cataracts, acne, muscle weakness, thinning of the skin,increased susceptibility to infection, stomach ulcers, increasedsweating, mood swings, psychological problems such as depression, andadrenal suppression and crisis. Advantageously, treatment ofinflammatory disease with a combination of a glucocorticoid and acompound of the invention enhances the anti-inflammatory properties ofboth classes of compounds while reducing the effects associated withhigh doses of glucocorticoids alone.

In methods of the invention, wherein a glucocorticoid is administeredconjointly with a compound of the invention, the glucocorticoid may bechosen from any glucocorticoid known in the art. Glucocorticoidssuitable for said conjoint administration include, but are not limitedto, alclometasone, amcinonide, beclometasone, betamethasone, budesonide,ciclesonide, clobetasol, clobetasone, clocortolone, cloprednol,cortisone, cortivazol, deflazacort, desonide, desoximetasone,desoxycortone, dexamethasone, diflorasone, diflucortolone,difluprednate, fluclorolone, fludroxycortide, flumetasone, flunisolide,fluocinolone acetonide, fluocinonide, fluocortin, fluocortolone,fluorometholone, fluperolone, fluprednidene, fluticasone, formocortal,halcinonide, halometasone, hydrocortisone/cortisol, hydrocortisoneaceponate, hydrocortisone buteprate, hydrocortisone butyrate,loteprednol, medrysone, meprednisone, methylprednisolone,methylprednisolone aceponate, mometasone furoate, paramethasone,prednicarbate, prednisone/prednisolone, prednylidene, rimexolone,tixocortol, triamcinolone, ulobetasol, mometasone, fluticasonepropionate, beclomethasone dipropionate, fluocinolone, flunisolidehemihydrate, mometasone furoate monohydrate, desoxymethasone,diflorasone diacetate, hydrocortisone acetate, difluorocortolone,fluorocortisone, flumethasone, flunisolide, fluorocortolone,prednisolone, prednisone, cortisol, 6a-methylprednisolone, alclometasonedipropionate, fluclorolone acetonide, fluocinolone acetonide,betamethasone benzoate, fluocoritin butyl, betamethasone dipropionate,fluocortolone preparations, betamethasone valerate, fluprednideneacetate, flurandrenolone, clobetasol propionate, clobetasol butyrate,hydrocortisone, hydrocortisone butyrate, methylprednisolone acetate,diflucortolone valerate, flumethasone pivalate, or triamcinoloneacetonide, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

In certain embodiments, the patient to be treated by a method of theinvention may already be receiving an anti-inflammatory drug (other thana glucocorticoid). In one preferred embodiment, the patient is alreadytaking a glucocorticoid, such as one of the glucocorticoids describedabove, and will continue to take that drug conjointly with a compound ofthe invention. Alternatively, the compound of the invention may be usedas a replacement for the previously administered anti-inflammatory drug.

In a related embodiment, the invention provides a method of reducing thedose of a glucocorticoid required to achieve a desired anti-inflammatoryeffect. Reducing the dose of glucocorticoid while maintaining potentanti-inflammatory properties is highly desirable due to side effectsassociated with certain glucocorticoids. Side effects of glucocorticoidsinclude increased appetite and weight gain, deposits of fat in thechest, face, upper back, and stomach, water and salt retention leadingto swelling and edema, high blood pressure, diabetes, slow healing ofwounds, osteoporosis, cataracts, acne, muscle weakness, thinning of theskin, increased susceptibility to infection, stomach ulcers, increasedsweating, mood swings, psychological problems such as depression, andadrenal suppression and crisis.

In this embodiment, the dose of a glucocorticoid is reduced by at least5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 25%, at least30%, at least 40%, at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least80%, at least 90%, or more. The actual reduction in glucocorticoid dosewill depend upon the nature and amount of the compound of the inventionbeing administered, the reduction in inflammation desired, and otherfactors set forth elsewhere in this application that are typicallyconsidered in treating a disease or condition. The amount of thecompound of the invention administered in this method will also dependupon the factors set forth above, as well as the nature and amount ofglucocorticoid being administered. In certain embodiments, the amount ofthe compound of the invention administered in this method is less than5%, less than 10%, less than 15%, less than 20%, less than 25%, lessthan 30%, less than 40%, less than 50%, less than 60%, less than 70%,less than 80%, or less than 90% of the dose of the compound of theinvention required to produce an anti-inflammatory effect withoutconjoint administration with a glucocorticoid.

In one embodiment, the method of treating or preventing inflammatorydisease according to this invention may comprise the additional step ofconjointly administering to the patient another anti-inflammatory agent,such as, for example, a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug (NSAID), amast cell stabilizer, or a leukotriene modifier.

In certain embodiments, the use of a composition comprising a compoundof the invention and a glucocorticoid according to this invention in thetreatment of inflammatory disease, does not preclude the separate butconjoint administration of another corticosteroid.

In certain embodiments, the use of a composition comprising both acompound of the invention and a glucocorticoid according to thisinvention in the treatment of inflammatory disease, does not precludethe separate but conjoint administration of another glucocorticoid.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention while conjointly administering a glucocorticoid. Moreover,such combinations may be conjointly administered with other therapeuticagents, such as other anti-inflammatory agents.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of a glucocorticoid as mentioned above;and c) instructions for the administration of the compound of theinvention and the glucocorticoid.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation e.g., for treating or preventing a disorder or        condition as discussed above, e.g., inflammatory disease.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with a glucocorticoid as mentioned above. Incertain embodiments, the kit further comprises a second pharmaceuticalformulation (e.g., as one or more single dosage forms) comprising aglucocorticoidas mentioned above.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of inflammatory disease (e.g., a non-steroidalanti-inflammatory drug (NSAID), a mast cell stabilizer, or a leukotrienemodifier) as mentioned above. In certain embodiments, the kit furthercomprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one or moresingle dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of inflammatory disease (e.g., a non-steroidalanti-inflammatory drug (NSAID), a mast cell stabilizer, or a leukotrienemodifier) as mentioned above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of inflammatory disease (e.g., a non-steroidal        anti-inflammatory drug (NSA/D), a mast cell stabilizer, or a        leukotriene modifier) as mentioned above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing inflammatory disease.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising a glucocorticoid as mentioned above;        and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing inflammatory disease.        Metabolic Diseases

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingcomplex disorders having an inflammatory component in a patientcomprising administering to said patient a compound of the invention. Incertain embodiments, the complex disorder having an inflammatorycomponent is type 2 diabetes or obesity.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventingmetabolic disorders in a patient comprising administering to saidpatient a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, themetabolic disorder is selected from an eating disorder, dyslipidemia,hypertrigylceridemia, hypertension, or metabolic syndrome.

The present invention further provides a method of treating orpreventing type 1 diabetes in a patient, comprising administering tosaid patient a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, thepresent invention provides a method of treating a patient at risk ofdeveloping type 1 diabetes comprising administering to said patient acompound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the present inventionprovides a method of treating a patient exhibiting one or more warningsigns of type 1 diabetes, such as extreme thirst; frequent urination;drowsiness or lethargy; sugar in urine; sudden vision changes; increasedappetite; sudden weight loss; fruity, sweet, or wine-like odor onbreath; heavy, labored breathing; stupor; or unconsciousness, comprisingadministering to said patient a compound of the invention.

The present invention further provides a method of treating orpreventing type 2 diabetes in a patient, comprising administering tosaid patient a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, thepresent invention provides a method of treating a patient at risk ofdeveloping type 2 diabetes comprising administering to said patient acompound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the present inventionprovides a method of treating a patient exhibiting one or more warningsigns of type 2 diabetes, such as extreme thirst; frequent urination;drowsiness or lethargy; sugar in urine; sudden vision changes; increasedappetite; sudden weight loss; fruity, sweet, or wine-like odor onbreath; heavy, labored breathing; stupor; or unconsciousness, comprisingadministering to said patient a compound of the invention.

The present invention further provides a method for protecting, e.g.,promoting the growth and/or survival of, beta cells of Islets ofLangerhans from lipid- or glucose-triggered toxicity in a patientcomprising administering to the patient a compound of the invention.

In certain embodiments, the methods of treating or preventing a complexdisorder having an inflammatory component, such as type 2 diabetes, orof treating type 1 diabetes according to this invention may comprise theadditional step of conjointly administering to the patient anothertreatment for diabetes including, but not limited to, sulfonylureas(e.g., chlorpropamide, tolbutamide, glyburide, glipizide, acetohexamide,tolazamide, gliclazide, gliquidone, or glimepiride), medications thatdecrease the amount of glucose produced by the liver (e.g., metformin),meglitinides (e.g., repaglinide or nateglinide), medications thatdecrease the absorption of carbohydrates from the intestine (e.g., alphaglucosidase inhibitors such as acarbose), medications that effectglycemic control (e.g., pramlintide or exenatide), DPP-IV inhibitors(e.g., sitagliptin), insulin treatment, or combinations of the above.

In certain embodiments, the methods of treating or preventing a complexdisorder having an inflammatory component, such as obesity, according tothis invention may comprise the additional step of conjointlyadministering to the patient another treatment for obesity including,but not limited to, orlistat, sibutramine, phendimetrazine, phentermine,diethylpropion, benzphetamine, mazindol, dextroamphetamine, rimonabant,cetilistat, GT 389-255, APD356, pramlintide/AC137, PYY3-36, AC162352/PYY3-36, oxyntomodulin, TM 30338, AOD 9604, oleoyl-estrone,bromocriptine, ephedrine, leptin, pseudoephedrine, or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts thereof.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of metabolic disorders, such as the agentsidentified above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation e.g., for treating or preventing complex disorders        having an inflammatory component (e.g., type 2 diabetes or        obesity), treating or preventing metabolic disorders (e.g.,        eating disorder, dyslipidemia, hypertrigylceridemia,        hypertension, or metabolic syndrome), treating or preventing        type 1 diabetes, treating a patient at risk of developing type 1        diabetes, treating a patient exhibiting warning signs of type 1        diabetes, or protecting (e.g., promoting the growth and/or        survival of) beta cells of Islets of Langerhans from lipid- or        glucose-triggered toxicity.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of diabetes (e.g., sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide,tolbutamide, glyburide, glipizide, acetohexamide, tolazamide,gliclazide, gliquidone, or glimepiride), medications that decrease theamount of glucose produced by the liver (e.g., metformin), meglitinides(e.g., repaglinide or nateglinide), medications that decrease theabsorption of carbohydrates from the intestine (e.g., alpha glucosidaseinhibitors such as acarbose), medications that effect glycemic control(e.g., pramlintide or exenatide), DPP-IV inhibitors (e.g., sitagliptin),insulin treatment, or combinations of the above) as mentioned above. Incertain embodiments, the kit further comprises a second pharmaceuticalformulation (e.g., as one or more single dosage forms) comprising anagent suitable for the treatment or prevention of diabetes (e.g.,sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide, tolbutamide, glyburide, glipizide,acetohexamide, tolazamide, gliclazide, gliquidone, or glimepiride),medications that decrease the amount of glucose produced by the liver(e.g., metformin), meglitinides (e.g., repaglinide or nateglinide),medications that decrease the absorption of carbohydrates from theintestine (e.g., alpha glucosidase inhibitors such as acarbose),medications that effect glycemic control (e.g., pramlintide orexenatide), DPP-IV inhibitors (e.g., sitagliptin), insulin treatment, orcombinations of the above) as mentioned above.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of obesity, as mentioned above. In certain embodiments, thekit further comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as oneor more single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for thetreatment or prevention of obesity, as mentioned above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of obesity as mentioned above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing complex disorders having an        inflammatory component (e.g., type 2 diabetes or obesity),        treating or preventing metabolic disorders (e.g., eating        disorder, dyslipidemia, hypertrigylceridemia, hypertension, or        metabolic syndrome), treating or preventing type 1 diabetes,        treating a patient at risk of developing type 1 diabetes,        treating a patient exhibiting warning signs of type 1 diabetes,        or protecting (e.g., promoting the growth and/or survival of)        beta cells of Islets of Langerhans from lipid- or        glucose-triggered toxicity.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of diabetes as mentioned above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing complex disorders having an        inflammatory component (e.g., type 2 diabetes or obesity),        treating or preventing metabolic disorders (e.g., eating        disorder, dyslipidemia, hypertrigylceridemia, hypertension, or        metabolic syndrome), treating or preventing type 1 diabetes,        treating a patient at risk of developing type 1 diabetes,        treating a patient exhibiting warning signs of type 1 diabetes,        or protecting (e.g., promoting the growth and/or survival of)        beta cells of Islets of Langerhans from lipid- or        glucose-triggered toxicity.        Ophthalmic Conditions

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing anophthalmic condition in a patient, comprising administering to saidpatient a compound of the invention (e.g., a compound of any one offormula I-III as shown above).

The present invention further provides a method of treating orpreventing an ophthalmic condition (such as dry eye) in a patient,comprising administering to said patient a compound of formula IV,

-   -   or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:    -   X is selected from —C(R⁷)═C(R⁷)—, -(cyclopropyl)-,        -(cyclobutyl)-, -(cyclopentyl)-, and -(cyclohexyl)-;    -   R¹ is selected from —OR^(a), —N(R^(a))—SO₂—R^(c) and        —N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein each of R^(a) and R^(b) is        independently selected from H, C₁-C₆-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl,        heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl, and R^(c) is selected from        C₁-C₆-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl;    -   R² is selected from —CH₂—, —C(O)—, —SO₂—, —PO(OR)—, and        tetrazole;    -   R is selected from hydrogen and alkyl;    -   R³ is selected from a carbocyclic ring, a heterocyclic ring,        —(CH₂)_(n)—, CH₂C(O)CH₂, and —CH₂—O—CH₂, wherein:        -   n is an integer from 1 to 3;        -   any hydrogen atom in R³ is optionally and independently            replaced by halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl,            heteroaryl, hydroxy, or O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl; and        -   any two hydrogen atoms bound to a common carbon atom in R³            are optionally taken together with the carbon atom to which            they are bound to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;    -   each of R^(4a) and R^(4b) is independently selected from        hydrogen, halo, —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O-aryl, O-heteroaryl,        —O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,        —O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl,        and —O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl, aryl or        heteroaryl is optionally substituted with up to 3 substituents        independently selected from halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl,        O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester, alkoxycarbonyl,        acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido, acylamino,        cyano, and nitro;    -   each of R^(5a) and R^(5b) is independently selected from        hydrogen, halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, and        heteroaryl, preferably hydrogen, halo and (C₁-C₅)-alkyl;    -   R⁶ is selected from -phenyl, —(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,        —(C₃-C₇)-cycloalkyl, C≡C phenyl, —C≡C—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, and        —O-phenyl, wherein phenyl is optionally substituted with up to 3        substituents independently selected from halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl,        O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester, alkoxycarbonyl,        acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido, acylamino,        cyano, and nitro,        -   and R⁶ is additionally selected from —C≡CH when:            -   a) X is —C(R⁷)═C(R⁷)— or -(cyclopropyl)-; or            -   b) each of R^(4a) and R^(4b) is hydrogen or halo; or            -   c) each of R^(5a) and R^(5b) is halo; or            -   d) R² is —CH₂—;    -   each R⁷ is independently selected from hydrogen and        (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, or two occurrences of R⁷ may optionally be taken        together with the carbons to which they are attached to form a        5- or 6-membered ring;    -   each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently selected from        hydrogen, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, aryl        and heteroaryl, or R^(10a) and R^(10b) are taken together with        the carbon atom to which they are bound to form a carbocyclic or        heterocyclic ring;    -   and each double bond is independently in an E- or a        Z-configuration.

In certain embodiments, R¹ is —OM, where M is a cation selected fromammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na, K, Mg, and Zn.

In certain embodiments, R² and R¹ together are

In certain embodiments, X is —C≡C—. In certain embodiments, X is—C(R⁷)═C(R⁷)—, -(cyclopropyl)-, -(cyclobutyl)-, -(cyclopentyl)-, or-(cyclohexyl)-. In certain embodiments, X is —C(R⁷)═C(R⁷)—. In certainembodiments, X is -(cyclopropyl)-, -(cyclobutyl)-, -(cyclopentyl)-, or-(cyclohexyl)-. In certain embodiments, X is -(cyclopropyl)-. In certainembodiments, X is —C≡C— or —C(R⁷)═C(R⁷)—. In certain embodiments whereinX is -(cyclopropyl)-, -(cyclobutyl)-, -(cyclopentyl)-, or-(cyclohexyl)-, the olefin and the carbon bearing R^(4a) are attached toadjacent carbons on the -(cyclopropyl)-, -(cyclobutyl)-,-(cyclopentyl)-, or -(cyclohexyl)- ring system.

In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is hydrogen. In certain embodiments,R^(4b) is halo, —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O-aryl, O-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, or—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl isoptionally substituted with up to 3 substituents independently selectedfrom halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester,alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido,acylamino, cyano, and nitro. In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is fluoro.In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is hydrogen, —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,—O-aryl, O-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl,—O—C(O)-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl,—O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, or —O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl,aryl or heteroaryl is optionally substituted with up to 3 substituentsindependently selected from halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl,thioether, amino, amido, acylamino, cyano, and nitro. In certainembodiments, R^(4b) is selected from —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O-aryl,O-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—C(O)-aryl, O—C(O)-heteroaryl, and—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)). In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is hydrogen,halo, —O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, or —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl,wherein any alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl is optionally substituted with upto 3 substituents independently selected from halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl,O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl,thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido, acylamino, cyano, andnitro. In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is selected from hydrogen, halo,—OH, or —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is —O-aryl,O-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, or—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl isoptionally substituted with up to 3 substituents independently selectedfrom halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester,alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido,acylamino, cyano, and nitro. In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is selectedfrom —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O-aryl, O-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, and—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl isoptionally substituted with up to 3 substituents independently selectedfrom halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester,alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido,acylamino, cyano, and nitro. In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is selectedfrom hydrogen or halo.

In certain embodiments, R^(4b) is in an (R) configuration. In certainembodiments, R^(4b) is in an (S) configuration.

In certain embodiments, R^(4a) is hydrogen. In certain embodiments,R^(4a) is halo, —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O-aryl, O-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, or—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl isoptionally substituted with up to 3 substituents independently selectedfrom halo, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester, alkoxycarbonyl,acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido, acylamino, cyano,and nitro. In certain embodiments, R^(4a) is fluoro. In certainembodiments, R^(4a) is hydrogen, —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O-aryl,O-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, or—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl isoptionally substituted with up to 3 substituents independently selectedfrom halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester,alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido,acylamino, cyano, and nitro. In certain embodiments, R^(4a) is selectedfrom —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O-aryl, O-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,O—C(O)-aryl, O—C(O)-heteroaryl, and —O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)). In certainembodiments, R^(4a) is hydrogen, halo, —O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,—O—C(O)—O-aryl, or —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, wherein any alkyl, aryl orheteroaryl is optionally substituted with up to 3 substituentsindependently selected from halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl,thioether, amino, amido, acylamino, cyano, and nitro. In certainembodiments, R^(4a) is selected from hydrogen, halo, —OH, or—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(4a) is —O-aryl,O-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, or—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl isoptionally substituted with up to 3 substituents independently selectedfrom halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester,alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido,acylamino, cyano, and nitro. In certain embodiments, R^(4a) is selectedfrom —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O-aryl, O-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)-aryl,—O—C(O)-heteroaryl, —O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl,—O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, and —O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl,aryl or heteroaryl is optionally substituted with up to 3 substituentsindependently selected from halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl,thioether, amino, amido, acylamino, cyano, and nitro. In certainembodiments, R^(4a) is selected from hydrogen or halo.

In certain embodiments, R^(4a) is in an (S) configuration. In certainembodiments, R^(4a) is in an (R) configuration.

In certain embodiments wherein R^(4a) is —OH, R^(5a) is selected fromhydrogen or (C₁-C₅)-alkyl. In certain embodiments wherein R^(4a) isselected from —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O-aryl, O-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, and—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), R^(5a) is selected from hydrogen or(C₁-C₅)-alkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(5a) is fluoro. In certainembodiments, R^(5a) is selected from hydrogen and (C₁-C₅)-alkyl.

In certain embodiments wherein R^(4b) is —OH, R^(5b) is selected fromhydrogen or (C₁-C₅)-alkyl. In certain embodiments wherein R^(4b) isselected from —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O-aryl, O-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)-aryl, —O—C(O)-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, —O—C(O)—O-aryl, —O—C(O)—O-heteroaryl, and—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), R^(5b) is selected from hydrogen or(C₁-C₅)-alkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(5b) is fluoro. In certainembodiments, R^(5b) is selected from hydrogen and (C₁-C₅)-alkyl.

In certain embodiments, R² is —CH₂—. In certain embodiments, R² is—C(O)—.

In certain embodiments, R^(a) is selected from H and C₁-C₆-alkyl. Incertain embodiments, R^(a) is selected from aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl,and heteroaralkyl.

In certain embodiments, R^(b) is selected from H and C₁-C₆-alkyl. Incertain embodiments, R^(b) is selected from aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl,and heteroaralkyl.

In certain embodiments, R^(c) is C₁-C₆-alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. Incertain embodiments, R^(c) is selected from aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl,and heteroaralkyl.

In certain embodiments wherein R³ is selected from a carbocyclic ring, aheterocyclic ring, —(CH₂)_(n)—, and CH₂C(O)CH₂, any hydrogen atom in R³is optionally and independently replaced by halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl,perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, hydroxy, or O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl. Incertain embodiments wherein R³ is —CH₂—O—CH₂, any hydrogen atom in R³ isoptionally and independently replaced by halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl,perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl. In certainembodiments, R³ is selected from —(CH₂)_(n)— and —CH₂—O—CH₂, wherein nis an integer from 1 to 3, and up to two hydrogen atoms in R³ areoptionally and independently replaced by (C₁-C₅)-alkyl. In certainembodiments, R³ is selected from a carbocyclic ring, a heterocyclicring, and CH₂C(O)CH₂, wherein n is an integer from 1 to 3; any hydrogenatom in R³ is optionally and independently replaced by halo,(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, hydroxy, orO—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl; and any two hydrogen atoms bound to a common carbonatom in R³ are optionally taken together with the carbon atom to whichthey are bound to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.

In certain embodiments, R^(10a) is hydrogen. In certain embodiments,R^(10a) is selected from (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,aryl and heteroaryl, or R^(10a) is taken together with R^(10b) and thecarbon atom to which they are bound to form a carbocyclic orheterocyclic ring.

In certain embodiments, R^(10b) is hydrogen. In certain embodiments,R^(10b) is selected from (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,aryl and heteroaryl, or R^(10b) is taken together with R^(10a) and thecarbon atom to which they are bound to form a carbocyclic orheterocyclic ring.

In certain embodiments, R¹ is —OR^(a). In certain embodiments, R¹ isselected from —N(R^(a))—SO₂—R^(c) and —N(R^(a))(R^(b)). In certainembodiments, R¹ is —N(R^(a))—SO₂—R^(c). In certain embodiments. R¹ isselected from —OR^(a) and —N(R^(a))(R^(b)). In certain embodiments, R¹is —N(R^(a))(R^(b)). In certain embodiments, R¹ is selected from—OR^(a), and —N(R^(a))—SO₂—R^(c).

In certain embodiments, R⁷ is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R⁷ is(C₁-C₅)-alkyl or two occurrences of R⁷ may optionally be taken togetherwith the carbons to which they are attached to form a 5- or 6-memberedring.

In certain embodiments, X is —C≡C— and R^(4b) is hydrogen.

In certain embodiments, X is —C≡C— and R^(4a) is hydrogen.

In certain embodiments, X is —C≡C—, R^(4a) is fluoro, and R^(5a) isfluoro.

In certain embodiments, X is —C≡C—, R^(4b) is fluoro, and R^(5b) isfluoro.

In certain embodiments, X is —C≡C—, and each of R^(4a) and R^(4b) isindependently selected from —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O-aryl, O-heteroaryl,—O—C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—C(O)-aryl, O—C(O)-heteroaryl, and—O—C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)).

In certain embodiments, X is —C≡C— and R² is —CH₂—.

In certain embodiments, X is -(cyclopropyl)-, -(cyclobutyl)-,-(cyclopentyl)-, and -(cyclohexyl)-. In certain embodiments, X is-(cyclopropyl)-.

In certain embodiments, X is —C(R⁷)═C(R⁷)—.

In certain embodiments, each of R^(a) and R^(b) is independentlyselected from H and C₁-C₆-alkyl; R^(c) is C₁-C₆-alkyl; R³ is selectedfrom —(CH₂)_(n)— and —CH₂—O—CH₂, wherein n is an integer from 1 to 3,and up to two hydrogen atoms in R³ are optionally and independentlyreplaced by (C₁-C₅)-alkyl; each of R^(4a) and R^(4b) is independentlyselected from hydrogen, halo, —OH, —O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl; and each of R^(10a)and R^(10b) is hydrogen.

In certain embodiments, each double bond is in an E-configuration. Incertain embodiments, each double bond is in a Z-configuration. Incertain embodiments, one double bond is in an E-configuration and onedouble bond is in a Z-configuration.

In certain embodiments, the invention contemplates any combination ofthe foregoing. Those skilled in the art will recognize that all specificcombinations of the individual possible residues of the variable regionsof the compounds as disclosed herein, e.g. R¹, R², R³, R^(4a), R^(4b),R^(5b), R⁶, R⁷, R^(10a), R^(10b), R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), n and X, arewithin the scope of the invention. As an example, any of the variousparticular recited embodiments for R^(4a) may be combined with any ofthe various particular recited embodiments of X.

In certain embodiments, the compound is selected from any one of:

The present invention further provides a method of treating orpreventing an ophthalmic condition (such as dry eye) in a patient,comprising administering to said patient a compound of the formula V,

or formula VI,

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of either of the foregoing,wherein:

-   -   R¹ is selected from —OR^(a), —N(R^(a))—SO₂—R^(c) and        —N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein each of R^(a) and R^(b) is        independently selected from H, C₁-C₆-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl,        heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl, and R^(c) is selected from        C₁-C₆-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl;    -   R² is selected from —C(O)—, —PO(OR)—, and tetrazole;    -   R is selected from hydrogen and alkyl;    -   R³ is selected from —(CH₂)_(n)— and —CH₂—O—CH₂, wherein n is an        integer from 1 to 3; and optionally up to two hydrogen atoms in        R³ are independently replaced by halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, or        O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl;    -   each of R^(5a) and R^(5b) is independently selected from        hydrogen, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl,        preferably hydrogen and (C₁-C₅)-alkyl;    -   R⁶ is selected from —C≡CH, -phenyl, —(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,        —(C₃-C₇)-cycloalkyl, C≡C phenyl, —C≡C(C₃-C₇) cycloalkyl,        —C≡C—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, and —O-phenyl, wherein phenyl is optionally        substituted with up to 3 substituents independently selected        from halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl,        ester, alkoxycarbonyl, acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether,        amino, amido, acylamino, cyano, and nitro;    -   each of R⁸ and R⁹ are independently selected from hydrogen,        —(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, -aryl, -heteroaryl, —C(O)—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl,        —C(O)-aryl, —C(O)-heteroaryl, —C(O)—O-aryl, —C(O)—O-heteroaryl,        and —C(O)—N(R^(a))(R^(b)), wherein any alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl        is optionally substituted with up to 3 substituents        independently selected from halo, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl,        O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, ester, alkoxycarbonyl,        acyl, thioester, thioacyl, thioether, amino, amido, acylamino,        cyano, and nitro;    -   each of R^(10a) and R^(10b) is independently selected from        hydrogen, (C₁-C₅)-alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, O—(C₁-C₅)-alkyl, aryl        and heteroaryl, or    -   R^(10a) and R^(10b) are taken together with the carbon atom to        which they are bound to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;        and    -   wherein each double bond is independently in an E- or a        Z-configuration.

In certain embodiments, R¹ is —OM, where M is a cation selected fromammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na, K, Mg, and Zn.

In certain embodiments, R² and R¹ together are

In certain embodiments, R² is —C(O)—. In certain embodiments, R¹ is—OR^(a), wherein R^(a) is hydrogen or C₁-C₆-alkyl. In certainembodiments, R³ is —(CH₂)_(n)—, wherein n is 3. In certain embodiments,R⁶ is —C≡CH. In certain embodiments, R^(5a) is hydrogen. In certainembodiments, R^(5b) is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R^(10a) ishydrogen. In certain embodiments, R^(10b) is hydrogen. In certainembodiments, R² is —C(O)—, R¹ is —OR^(a), wherein R^(a) is C₁-C₆-alkyl,R³ is —(CH₂)_(n)—, wherein n is 3, R⁶ is —C≡CH, R^(5a) is hydrogen,R^(5b) is hydrogen, R^(10a) is hydrogen, and R^(10b) is hydrogen.

In certain embodiments, the compound is selected from any one of:

The present invention further provides a method of treating orpreventing an ophthalmic condition (such as dry eye) in a patient,comprising administering to said patient a compound of formula VII,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   Re and Rf are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl (e.g., alkoxyacyl, aminoacyl),    aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or silyl;-   E is a hydroxyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino,    or arylamino;-   Rh and Ri are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl;-   R₅ is selected from i-iv as follows: i) CH₂CH(R₆)CH₂, where R₆ is    hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,    fluoro, hydroxyl or alkoxy; ii) CH₂C(R₆R₇)CH₂, where R₆ and R₇ are    each independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, or    fluoro, or R₆ and R₇ are connected together to form a carbocyclic or    heterocyclic ring; iii) CH₂OCH₂, CH₂C(O)CH₂, or CH₂CH₂; or iv) R₅ is    a carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl ring; and-   R₈ and R₉ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, aryl or heteroaryl, or R₈ and R₉    are connected together to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula VII is represented byformula VIII,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:Re, Rf, R₅, and E are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula VII or VIII is representedby formula IX,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:Re, Rf, and E are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula A,

wherein:

each of W′ and Y′ is a bond or a linker independently selected from aring containing up to 20 atoms or a chain of up to 20 atoms, providedthat W′ and Y′ can independently include one or more nitrogen, oxygen,sulfur or phosphorous atoms, further provided that W′ and Y′ canindependently include one or more substituents independently selectedfrom hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, chloro, iodo,bromo, fluoro, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, carboxy, amino, alkylamino,dialkylamino, acylamino, carboxamido, cyano, oxo, thio, alkylthio,arylthio, acylthio, alkylsulfonate, arylsulfonate, phosphoryl, orsulfonyl, further provided that W′ and Y′ can independently contain oneor more fused carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl rings, andfurther provided that when o′ is 0, and V₁ is

Y′ is connected to V₁ via a carbon atom;

V₁ is selected from

wherein when q′ is 0 and V₃ is a bond, n′ is 0 or 1; otherwise n′ is 1;

V₂ is selected from a bond,

wherein:

-   -   L′ is selected from —C(R¹⁰⁰³)(R¹⁰⁰⁴)—, wherein each of R¹⁰⁰³ and        R¹⁰⁰⁴ is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,        alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, aryl or heteroaryl, or R¹⁰⁰³        and R¹⁰⁰⁴ are connected together to form a carbocyclic or        heterocyclic ring; when V₃ is

-   -    L′ is additionally selected from W′; and n′ is 0 or 1;

V₃ is selected from a bond or

wherein:

-   -   each R¹⁰⁰¹ and R¹⁰⁰² is independently for each occurrence        selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl,        heteroaryl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, or halo, wherein said alkyl- or        aryl-containing moiety is optionally substituted with up to 3        independently selected substituents;    -   each of R^(a′) and R^(b′) is independently for each occurrence        selected from —OR′ or —N(R′)₂, or adjacent R^(a′) and R^(b′) are        taken together to form an epoxide ring having a cis or trans        configuration, wherein each R′ is independently selected from        hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl,        silyl, alkoxyacyl, aminoacyl, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or        a protecting group;

or when V₁ is

and V₂ is

R¹⁰⁰² and R^(b′) are both hydrogen;

X′ is selected from —CN, —C(NH)N(R″)(R″), —C(S)-A′, —C(S)R″, —C(O)-A′,—C(O)—R″, —C(O)—SR″, —C(O)—NH—S(O)₂—R″, —S(O)₂-A′, —S(O)₂—R″,S(O)₂N(R″)(R″), —P(O)₂-A′, —PO(OR″)-A′, -tetrazole, alkyltetrazole, or—CH₂OH, wherein

-   -   A′ is selected from —OR″, —N(R″)(R″) or —OM′;    -   each R″ is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl,        arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl or a detectable label        molecule, wherein any alkyl-, aryl- or heteroaryl-containing        moiety is optionally substituted with up to 3 independently        selected substituents; and    -   M′ is a cation;

G′ is selected from hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl,heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, carboxy, amino,alkylamino, dialkylamino, acylamino, carboxamido or a detectable labelmolecule, wherein any alkyl-, aryl- or heteroaryl-containing moiety isoptionally substituted with up to 3 independently selected substituents;

o′ is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;

p′ is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;

q′ is 0, 1, or 2; and

o′+p′+q′ is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;

wherein:

if V₂ is a bond, then q′ is 0, and V₃ is a bond;

if V₃ is

then o′ is 0, V₁ is

p′ is 1 and V₂ is

any acyclic double bond may be in a cis or a trans configuration or isoptionally replaced by a triple bond; and

either one

portion of the compound, if present, is optionally replaced by

or one

portion of the compound, if present, is optionally replaced by

wherein Q′ represents one or more substituents and each Q′ isindependently selected from halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl,aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl,alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, amino, hydroxy, cyano, carboxyl,alkoxycarbonyloxy, aryloxycarbonyloxy or aminocarbonyl.

In certain embodiments, V₁ is selected from

In certain embodiments, V₂ is selected from a bond,

In certain embodiments, when q′ is 0 and V₃ is a bond, n′ is 0 or 1;otherwise n′ is 1.

In certain embodiments, p′ is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 5.

In certain embodiments, q′ is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, if V₁ is

then o′ is 0 or 1, p′ is 1 or 2, o′+p′ is 1 or 2, V₂ is

and V₃ is a bond.

In certain embodiments, if V₁ is

then o′ is 3, 4 or 5, p′ is 0, 1 or 2, o′+p′ is 4 or 5, and V₂ is abond.

In certain embodiments, if V₂ is a bond, then o′ is 0, 3, 4 or 5; p′ is0, 1, 2 or 5, o′+p′ is 4 or 5, q′ is 0, and V₃ is a bond.

In certain embodiments, each of W′ and Y′ is independently selected froma bond or lower alkyl or heteroalkyl optionally substituted with one ormore substituents independently selected from alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl,chloro, iodo, bromo, fluoro, hydroxy, amino, or oxo.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 1,

wherein:

-   Carbons a′ and b′ are connected by a double bond or a triple bond;-   Carbons c′ and d′ are connected by a double bond or a triple bond;-   Re, Rf, and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl,    alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl (e.g., alkoxyacyl,    aminoacyl), aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or silyl;-   Rh, Ri and Rj are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl,    alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl;-   I is selected from —C(O)-E, —SO₂-E, —PO(OR)-E, where E is hydroxy,    alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, or arylamino; and    R is hydrogen or alkyl;-   J, L and H are linkers independently selected from a ring containing    up to 20 atoms or a chain of up to 20 atoms, provided that J, L and    H can independently include one or more nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or    phosphorous atoms, and further provided that J, L and H can    independently include one or more substituents selected from    hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, chloro, iodo,    bromo, fluoro, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, carboxy, amino, alkylamino,    dialkylamino, acylamino, carboxamido, cyano, oxo, thio, alkylthio,    arylthio, acylthio, alkylsulfonate, arylsulfonate, phosphoryl, and    sulfonyl, and further provided that J, L and H can also contain one    or more fused carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl rings,    and provided that linker J is connected to the adjacent C(R)OR group    via a carbon atom;-   G is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, chloro, iodo, bromo, fluoro, hydroxy,    alkoxy, aryloxy, carboxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino,    acylamino, or carboxamido;-   or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

In certain embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of thecompound is formed by derivatizing E, wherein E is —OM, where M is acation selected from ammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na, K, Mg, and Zn.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula 1 is represented byformula 2,

wherein:E, Re, Rf, and Rg are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of thecompound is formed by derivatizing E, wherein E is —OM, where M is acation selected from ammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na, K, Mg, and Zn.

Exemplary compounds of formula 2 include compound 2a:

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula 1 is represented byformula 3,

wherein:E, Re, Rf, and Rg are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of thecompound is formed by derivatizing E, wherein E is —OM, where M is acation selected from ammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na, K, Mg, and Zn.

Exemplary compounds of formula 3 include compound 3a,

and compound 3b,

Further exemplary compounds of formula 1 include Compound X,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 4,

wherein:

-   A is H or —OP₄;-   P₁, P₂ and P₄ each individually is a protecting group or hydrogen    atom;-   R₁ and R₂ each individually is a substituted or unsubstituted,    branched or unbranched alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl group, substituted    or unsubstituted aryl group, substituted or unsubstituted, branched    or unbranched alkylaryl group, halogen atom, hydrogen atom;    Z is —C(O)OR^(d), —C(O)NR^(c)R^(c), —C(O)H, —C(NH)NR^(c)R^(c),    —C(S)H, —C(S)OR^(d), —C(S)NR^(e)R^(e), —CN, preferably a carboxylic    acid, ester, amide, thioester, thiocarboxamide or a nitrile;    -   each R^(a), if present, is independently selected from hydrogen,        (C1-C6) alkyl, (C2-C6) alkenyl, (C2-C6) alkynyl, (C3-C8)        cycloalkyl, cyclohexyl, (C4-C11) cycloalkylalkyl, (C5-C10) aryl,        phenyl, (C6-C16) arylalkyl, benzyl, 2-6 membered heteroalkyl,        3-8 membered heterocyclyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl,        homopiperazinyl, piperidinyl, 4-11 membered heterocyclylalkyl,        5-10 membered heteroaryl and 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl;-   each R^(b), if present, is a suitable group independently selected    from ═O, —OR^(d), (C1-C3) haloalkyloxy, —OCF₃, ═S, —SR^(d), ═NR^(d),    ═NOR^(d), —NR^(c)R^(c), halogen, —CF₃, —CN, —NC, —OCN, —SCN, —NO,    —NO₂, ═N₂, —N₃, —S(O)R^(d), —S(O)₂R^(d), —S(O)₂OR^(d),    —S(O)NR^(c)R^(c), —S(O)₂NR^(c)R^(c), —OS(O)R^(d), —OS(O)₂R^(d),    —OS(O)₂OR^(d), —OS(O)₂NR^(c)R^(c), —C(O)R^(d), —C(O)OR^(d),    —C(O)NR^(c)R^(c), —C(NH)NR^(c)R^(c), —C(NR^(a))NR^(c)R^(c),    —C(NOH)R^(a), —C(NOH)NR^(c)R^(c), —OC(O)R^(d), —OC(O)OR^(d),    —OC(O)NR^(c)R^(c), —OC(NH)NR^(c)R^(c), —OC(NR^(a))NR^(c)R^(c),    —[NHC(O)]_(n)R^(d), —[NR^(a)C(O)], R^(d), —[NHC(O)]_(n) OR^(d),    —[NR^(a)C(O)]_(n)OR^(d), [NHC(O)]_(n)NR^(c)R^(c),    —[NR^(a)C(O)]_(n)NR^(c)R^(c), —[NHC(NH)]_(n)NR^(c)R^(c) and    —[NR^(a)C(NR^(a))]_(n)NR^(c)R^(c);-   each R^(c), if present, is independently a protecting group or    R^(a), or, alternatively, two R^(c) taken together with the nitrogen    atom to they are bonded form a 5 to 8-membered heterocyclyl or    heteroaryl which optionally including one or more additional    heteroatoms and optionally substituted with one or more of the same    or different R^(a) or suitable R^(b) groups;-   each n independently is an integer from 0 to 3;-   each R^(d) independently is a protecting group or R^(a);-   or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

Exemplary compounds of formula 4 include compound 4a,

compound 4b,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 5,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:the stereochemistry of the carbon ii′ to carbon jj′ bond is cis ortrans;P₃ is a protecting group or hydrogen atom; andP₁, P₂, R₁ and Z are as defined above in formula 4.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon ii′ to carbonjj′ bond is trans.

Exemplary compounds of formula 5 include compound 5a,

compound 5b,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 6,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   the stereochemistry of the carbon gg′ to carbon hh′ bond is cis or    trans;-   each X represents hydrogen or taken together both X groups represent    one substituted or unsubstituted methylene, an oxygen atom, a    substituted or unsubstituted N atom, or a sulfur atom such that a    three-membered ring is formed; and-   P₁, P₂, P₃, R₁ and Z are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon gg′ to carbonhh′ bond is trans.

Exemplary compounds of formula 6 include compound 6a,

compound 6b,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 7,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   Carbons e′ and f′ are connected by a double bond or a triple bond,    and when carbon e′ is connected to carbon f′ through a double bond    the stereochemistry is cis or trans;-   Carbons g′ and h′ are connected by a double bond or a triple bond    and when carbon g′ is connected to carbon h′ through a double bond    the stereochemistry is cis or trans;-   m is 0 or 1;-   T′ is hydrogen, (C1-C6) alkyl, (C2-C6) alkenyl, (C2-C6) alkynyl,    (C5-C14) aryl, (C6-C16) arylalkyl, 5-14 membered heteroaryl, 6-16    membered heteroarylalkyl, or —CH═CHCH₂CH₃;-   T is —(CH₂)_(q)— or —(CH₂)_(q)—O—, where q is an integer from 0 to    6;-   Z′ is (C1-C6) alkylene optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or    6 of the same or different halogen atoms, —(CH₂)_(p)—O—CH₂— or    —(CH₂)_(m)—S—CH₂—, where p is an integer from 0 to 4;-   R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ each individually is substituted or unsubstituted,    branched or unbranched alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl group, substituted    or unsubstituted aryl group, substituted or un substituted, branched    or unbranched alkyl aryl group, C₁₋₄alkoxy, halogen atom, —CH₂R₁₄,    —CHR₁₄R₁₄, —CR₁₄R₁₄R₁₄, or a hydrogen atom;-   R₁₄ is independently for each occurrence selected from —CN, —NO₂ or    halogen;-   P₁, P₂, P₃, and Z are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, carbons e′ and f′ are connected by a cis doublebond.

In certain embodiments, carbons g′ and h′ are connected by a doublebond.

In certain embodiments, carbons e′ and f′ are connected by a cis doublebond and carbons g′ and h′ are connected by a double bond.

Exemplary compounds of formula 7 include compound 7a,

compound 7b,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 8,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   the stereochemistry of the carbon i′ to carbon j′ bond is cis or    trans;-   m is 0 or 1;-   D′ is CH₃, —CH═CHCH₂U or —CH═CHCH₂CH₂A;-   U is a branched or unbranched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl,    alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylcarbonyl,    arylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyloxy,    and aryloxycarbonyloxy group;-   A is H or —OP₄;-   P₁, P₂, P₄, R₁, R₂ and Z are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon i′ to carbonj′ bond is cis.

Exemplary compounds of formula 8 include compound 8a,

compound 8b,

compound 8c,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 9,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   Carbons k′ and l′ are connected by a double bond or a triple bond,    and when carbon k′ is connected to carbon l′ through a double bond    the stereochemistry is cis or trans;-   the stereochemistry of the carbon m′ to carbon n′ double bond is cis    or trans;-   m is 0 or 1;-   D is —CH₃ or —CH═CHCH₇CH₃;-   P₁, P₂, P₃, R₁, X, and Z are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon m′ to carbonn′ double bond is cis.

In certain embodiments, carbons k′ and l′ are connected by a cis doublebond.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon m′ to carbonn′ double bond is cis and carbons k′ and l′ are connected by a cisdouble bond.

Exemplary compounds of formula 9 include compound 9a,

compound 9b,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 10.

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   P₁, P₂, P₃, R₁ and Z are as defined above; and-   Q represents one or more substituents and each Q individually, if    present, is a halogen atom or a branched or unbranched, substituted    or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, alkoxy,    aryloxy, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl,    aryloxycarbonyl, amino, hydroxy, cyano, carboxyl, alkoxycarbonyloxy,    aryloxycarbonyloxy or aminocarbonyl group.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 11.

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:P₁, P₂, P₃, R₁, and Z are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 12,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:P₁, P₂, P₃, R₁, and Z are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 13,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:P₁, P₂, R₁, R₂, U, and Z are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 14,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:P₁, P₂, R₁, R₂, Q, and Z are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 15,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:P₁, P₂, and Z are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 16,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:P₁ and Z are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 17,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:

-   Carbons o′ and p′ are connected by a single or a double bond (e.g.,    a cis or trans double bond);-   Carbons q′ and r′ are connected by a single or a double bond (e.g.,    a cis or trans double bond); and-   P₁, P₂, and Z are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 18,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:the stereochemistry of the carbon s′ to carbon t′ double bond is cis ortrans;the stereochemistry of the carbon u′ to carbon v′ double bond is cis ortrans; andP₁, P₂, R₁, R₂, and Z are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 19.

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:Carbons w′ and x′ are connected by a single or a double bond;Carbons y′ and z′ are connected by a single or a double bond; andP₁, P₂, and Z are as defined above.

In certain embodiments of formulae 4 to 19, each R^(b), if present, is asuitable group independently selected from ═O, —OR^(d), (C1-C3)haloalkyloxy, —OCF₃, ═S, —SR^(d), ═NR^(d), ═NOR^(d), —NR^(c)R^(c),halogen, —CF₃, —CN, —NC, —OCN, —SCN, —NO, —NO₂, ═N₂, —N₃, —S(O)R^(d),—S(O)₂R^(d), —S(O)₂OR^(d), —S(O)NR^(c)R^(c), —S(O)₂NR^(c)R^(c),—OS(O)R^(d), —OS(O)₂R^(d), —OS(O)₂OR^(d), —OS(O)₂NR^(c)R^(c),—C(O)R^(d), —C(O)OR^(d), —C(O)NR^(c)R^(c), —C(NH)NR^(c)R^(c),—C(NR^(a))NR^(c)R^(c), —C(NOH)R^(a), —C(NOH)NR^(c)R^(c), —OC(O)R^(d),—OC(O)OR^(d), —OC(O)NR^(c)R^(c), —OC(NH)NR^(c)R^(c), —OC(NH)NR^(c)R^(c),—[NHC(O)]_(n)R^(d), —[NR^(a)C(O)]_(n)R^(d), —[NHC(O)]_(n)OR^(d),[NHC(O)]_(n)NR^(c)R^(c), —[NR^(a)C(O)]_(n)NR^(c)R^(c),—[NHC(NH)]_(n)NR^(c)R^(c) and —[NR^(a)C(NR^(a))]_(n)NR^(c)R^(c).

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts of any of the above, wherein:each P is individually selected from H or a protecting group; andR is H, C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl, glycerol), C₂₋₆alkenyl orC₂₋₆alkynyl.

Exemplary compounds of formula 21 include compound 21a,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 29.

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof,wherein:

-   D₁-E₁ and F₁-G₁ are independently are cis or trans —C═C— or —C≡C—;-   R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂ and R₁₀₃ are independently selected from hydrogen,    (C1-C4) straight-chained or branched alkyl, (C2-C4) alkenyl, (C2-C4)    alkynyl, (C1-C4) alkoxy, —CH₂R₁₀₄, —CHR₁₀₄R₁₀₄ and —CR₁₀₄R₁₀₄R₁₀₄;-   each R₁₀₄ is independently selected from CN, —NO₂ and halogen;-   W₁ is selected from —R₁₀₅, —OR_(10s), —SR₁₀₅ and —NR₁₀₅R₁₀₅;-   each R₁₀₅ is independently selected from hydrogen, (C1-C6) alkyl,    (C2-C6) alkenyl or (C2-C6) alkynyl optionally substituted with one    or more of the same or different R groups, (C5-C14) aryl optionally    substituted with one or more of the same or different R groups,    phenyl optionally substituted with one or more of the same or    different R groups, (C6-C16) arylalkyl optionally substituted with    one or more of the same or different R groups, 5-14 membered    heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more of the same or    different R groups, 6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl optionally    substituted with one or more of the same or different R groups and a    detectable label molecule;-   A₁ is selected from (C1-C6) alkylene optionally substituted with 1,    2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 of the same or different halogen atoms,    —(CH₂)_(m)—O—CH₂— and —(CH₂)_(m)—S—CH₂—, where m is an integer from    0 to 4;-   X₁ is selected from —(CH₂)_(n)— and —(CH₂)_(n)—O—, where n is an    integer from 0 to 6;-   Y₁ is selected from hydrogen, (C1-C6) alkyl, (C2-C6) alkenyl, or    (C2-C6) alkynyl, optionally substituted with one or more of the same    or different R₁₀₀ groups, (C5-C14) aryl optionally substituted with    one or more of the same or different R₁₀₀ groups, phenyl, optionally    substituted with one or more of the same or different R₁₀₀ groups,    (C6-C16) arylalkyl optionally substituted with one or more of the    same or different R₁₀₀ groups, 5-14 membered heteroaryl optionally    substituted with one or more of the same or different R₁₀₀ groups,    6-16 membered heteroarylalkyl optionally substituted with one or    more of the same or different R₁₀₀ groups and a detectable label    molecule;-   each R₁₀₀ is independently selected from an electronegative group,    ═O, —OR^(a1), (C1-C3) haloalkyloxy, ═S, —SR^(a1), ═NR^(a1),    ═NONR^(a1), —NR^(c1)R^(c1), halogen, —CF₃, —CN, —NC, —OCN, —SCN,    —NO, —NO₂, ═N₂, —N₃, —S(O)R^(a1), —S(O)₂R^(a1), —S(O)₂OR^(a1),    —S(O)₂NR^(c1)R^(c1), OS(O)R^(a1), —OSO₂R^(a1), —OS(O)₂OR^(a1),    —OS(O)₂NR^(c1)R^(c1), —C(O)R^(a1), —C(O)OR^(a1), —C(O)NR^(c1)R^(c1),    —C(NH)NR^(c1)R^(c1), —OC(O)R^(a1), —OC(O)OR^(a1),    —OC(O)NR^(c1)R^(c1), —OC(NH)NR^(c1)R^(c1), —NHC(O)R^(a1),    —NHC(O)OR^(a1), —NHC(O)NR^(c1)R^(c1) and —NHC(NH)NR^(c1)R^(c1);-   each R^(a1) is independently selected from hydrogen, (C1-C4) alkyl,    (C2-C4) alkenyl or (C2-C4) alkynyl; and-   each R^(c1) is independently an R^(a1) or, alternatively,    R^(c1)R^(c1) taken together with the nitrogen atom to which it is    bonded forms a 5 or 6 membered ring.

In certain embodiments of Formula 29, when X₁—Y₁ is —CH₂CH₃, then atleast one of R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂ or R₁₀₃ is other than hydrogen.

In certain embodiments, a compound of Formula 29 is represented byFormula 30,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof,wherein:D₁-E₁ and F₁-G₁ are independently are cis or trans —C═C— or —C≡C—; andR₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₃, R₁₀₄, W₁, R₁₀₅, A₁, X₁, n, Y₁, R₁₀₀, R^(a1), andR^(c1) are as defined above.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formulae 31 to 37

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof,wherein:R₁₀₆ is —OH, —OCH₃, —OCH(CH₃)₂ or —NHCH₂CH₃; andR₁₀₇ is

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 38.

wherein

-   Carbons aa′ and bb′ are connected by a double bond or a triple bond;-   Carbons cc′ and dd′ are connected by a double bond or a triple bond;-   Re, Rf, and Rg are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl,    alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl (e.g., alkoxyacyl,    aminoacyl), aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or silyl;-   E is hydroxyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, or    arylamino;-   Rh, Ri and Rj are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl,    alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl;-   R₄ is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, fluoro, hydroxyl, alkoxy, aryloxy;-   R₅ is selected from i-iv as follows: i) CH₂CH(R₆)CH₂, where R₆ is    hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,    fluoro, hydroxyl or alkoxy; ii) CH₂C(R₆R₇)CH₂, where R₆ and R₇ are    each independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, or    fluoro, or R₆ and R₇ are connected together to form a carbocyclic or    heterocyclic ring; iii) CH₂OCH₂, CH₂C(O)CH₂, or CH₂CH₂; or iv) R₅ is    a carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl ring; and-   R₈ and R₉ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, aryl or heteroaryl, or R₈ and R₉    are connected together to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;-   or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

In certain embodiments R₈ and R₉ are hydrogen.

In certain embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of thecompound is formed by derivatizing E, wherein E is —OM, where M is acation selected from ammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na, K, Mg, and Zn.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formulae 39-44,

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein:Re, Rf, E, Ri, R₅, R₈ and R₉ are as defined above.

Exemplary compounds of formulae 39, 41, and 43 include:

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

In certain embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of thecompound is formed by derivatizing E, wherein E is —OM, where M is acation selected from ammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na, K, Mg, and Zn.Examples of such compounds include compound Z,

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 46.

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:

-   each    independently designates a double or triple bond;-   R¹, R², and R³ are each independently OR, OX¹, SR, SX², N(R)₂, NHX³,    NRC(O)R, NRC(O)N(R)₂, C(O)OR, C(O)N(R)₂, SO₂R, NRSO₂R, C(O)R, or    SO₂N(R)₂;-   each R is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally    substituted group selected from C₁₋₆ aliphatic, a 3-8 membered    saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4    heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur,    or;-   two R on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to    form a 5-8 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring having 1-3    heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;-   each X¹ is independently a suitable hydroxyl protecting group;-   each X² is independently a suitable thiol protecting group;-   each X³ is independently a suitable amino protecting group; and-   R⁴ is NRC(O)R, NRC(O)N(R)₂, C(O)OR, C(O)N(R)₂, SO₂R, NRSO₂R, C(O)R,    or SO₂N(R)₂.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 47:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:

-   the stereochemistry of the carbon kk′ to carbon ll′ double bond is    cis or trans;-   the stereochemistry of the carbon mm′ to carbon nn′ double bond is    cis or trans;-   the stereochemistry of the carbon oo′ to carbon pp′ double bond is    cis or trans;-   Y′ is a bond or a linker selected from a ring containing up to 20    atoms or a chain of up to 20 atoms, provided that Y′ can include one    or more nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorous atoms, further    provided that Y′ can include one or more substituents independently    selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl,    chloro, iodo, bromo, fluoro, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, carboxy,    amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, acylamino, carboxamido, cyano, oxo,    thio, alkylthio, arylthio, acylthio, alkylsulfonate, arylsulfonate,    phosphoryl, or sulfonyl, further provided that Y′ can contain one or    more fused carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl rings;-   Z′ is selected from —CN, —C(NH)N(R″)(R″), —C(S)-A′, —C(S)R″,    —C(O)-A′, —C(O)—R″, —C(O)—SR″, —C(O)—NH—S(O)₂—R″, —S(O)₂-A′,    —S(O)₂—R″, S(O)₂N(R″)(R″), —P(O)₂-A′, —PO(OR″)-A′, -tetrazole,    alkyltetrazole, or —CH₂OH, wherein    -   A′ is selected from —OR″, —N(R″)(R″) or —OM′;    -   each R″ is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl,        arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl or a detectable label        molecule, wherein any alkyl-, aryl- or heteroaryl-containing        moiety is optionally substituted with up to 3 independently        selected substituents; and    -   M′ is a cation.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula 47 is represented byformula 48,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof, wherein:the stereochemistry of the carbon kk′ to carbon ll′ double bond is cisor trans;the stereochemistry of the carbon mm′ to carbon nn′ double bond is cisor trans;the stereochemistry of the carbon oo′ to carbon pp′ double bond is cisor trans.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon kk′ to carbonll′ double bond is trans.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon mm′ to carbonnn′ double bond trans.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon oo′ to carbonpp′ double bond is cis.

In certain embodiments, the stereochemistry of the carbon kk′ to carbonll′ double bond is trans, the stereochemistry of the carbon mm′ tocarbon nn′ double bond trans, and the stereochemistry of the carbon oo′to carbon pp′ double bond is cis.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula 47 is represented bycompound 48a,

compound 48b,

compound 48c,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

In certain embodiments, a compound of formula 47 is represented byformula 48d,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof, wherein:the stereochemistry of the carbon kk′ to carbon ll′ double bond is cisor trans;the stereochemistry of the carbon mm′ to carbon nn′ double bond is cisor trans;the stereochemistry of the carbon oo′ to carbon pp′ double bond is cisor trans.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention include those of Formula 49.

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof, wherein:

-   Y′ is a bond or a linker selected from a ring containing up to 20    atoms or a chain of up to 20 atoms, provided that Y′ can include one    or more nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorous atoms, further    provided that Y′ can include one or more substituents independently    selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl,    chloro, iodo, bromo, fluoro, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, carboxy,    amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, acylamino, carboxamido, cyano, oxo,    thio, alkylthio, arylthio, acylthio, alkylsulfonate, arylsulfonate,    phosphoryl, or sulfonyl, further provided that Y′ can contain one or    more fused carbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl rings;-   Z′ is selected from —CN, —C(NH)N(R″)(R″), —C(S)-A′, —C(S)R″,    —C(O)-A′, —C(O)—R″, —C(O)—SR″, —C(O)—NH—S(O)₂—R″, —S(O)₂-A′,    —S(O)₂—R″, S(O)₂N(R″)(R″), —P(O)₂-A′, —PO(OR″)-A′, -tetrazole,    alkyltetrazole, or —CH₂OH, wherein    -   A′ is selected from —OR″, —N(R″)(R″) or —OM′;    -   each R″ is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl,        arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl or a detectable label        molecule, wherein any alkyl-, aryl- or heteroaryl-containing        moiety is optionally substituted with up to 3 independently        selected substituents; and    -   M′ is a cation; and-   each of R^(a′) and R^(b′) is independently for each occurrence    selected from —OR′, or adjacent R^(a′) and R^(b′) are taken together    to form an epoxide ring having a cis or trans configuration, wherein    each R′ is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,    alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, acyl, silyl, alkoxyacyl, aminoacyl,    aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or a protecting group.

Exemplary compounds of formula 49 include compound 49a,

compound 49b,

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters thereof.

The compounds above (e.g., compounds of formula A or formulae 1 to 49)are known to be useful in the treatment or prevention of inflammation orinflammatory disease. Examples of such compounds are disclosed in thefollowing patents and applications: US 2003/0191184, WO 2004/014835, WO2004/078143, U.S. Pat. No. 6,670,396, US 2003/0236423, US 2005/0228047,US 2005/0238589 and US2005/0261255. These compounds are suitable for usein methods and compositions of the present invention.

Additional compounds suitable for use in methods and compositions of theinvention are compounds that are chemically similar variants to any ofthe compounds of formula A or formulae 1-49 or I-III set forth above.The term “chemically similar variants” includes, but is not limited to,replacement of various moieties with known biosteres; replacement of theend groups of one of the compounds above with a corresponding end groupof any other compound above, modification of the orientation of anydouble bond in a compound, the replacement of any double bond with atriple bond in any compound, and the replacement of one or moresubstituents present in one of the compounds above with a correspondingsubstituent of any other compound.

Lipoxin compounds suitable for use in the methods and compositions ofthis invention include those of formula 50:

wherein:

X is R₃₀₁, OR₃₀₁, or SR₃₀₁;

R₃₀₁ is

-   -   (a) a hydrogen atom;    -   (b) an alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which may be        straight chain or branched;    -   (c) a cycloalkyl of 3 to 10 carbon atoms;    -   (d) an aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbon atoms;    -   (e) phenyl;    -   (f) substituted phenyl

-   -   -   wherein Z_(i)Z_(ii), Z_(iii), Z_(iv) and Z_(v) are each            independently selected from —NO₂, —CN, —C(═O)—R₃₀₁, —SO₃H, a            hydrogen atom, halogen, methyl, —OR_(x), wherein R_(x) is 1            to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which may be a straight chain            or branched, and hydroxyl, wherein when any of Z_(i)Z_(ii),            Z_(iii), Z_(iv) or Z_(v) is C(═O)—R₃₀₁, said Z_(i)Z_(ii),            Z_(iii), Z_(iv) or Z_(v) is not substituted with another            C(═O)—R₃₀₁.

    -   (g) a detectable label molecule; or

    -   (h) a straight or branched chain alkenyl of 2 to 8 carbon atoms,        inclusive;

Q₁ is (C═O), SO₂ or (CN), provided when Q₁ is CN, then X is absent;

Q₃ and Q₄ are each independently O, S or NH;

one of R₃₀₂ and R₃₀₃ is a hydrogen atom and the other is:

-   -   (a) H;    -   (b) an alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which may be a        straight chain or branched;    -   (c) a cycloalkyl of 3 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive;    -   (d) an alkenyl of 2 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which may be        straight chain or branched; or    -   (e) R_(k)Q₂R₁ wherein Q₂ is —O— or —S—; wherein R_(k) is        alkylene of 0 to 6 carbons atoms, inclusive, which may be        straight chain or branched and wherein R₁ is alkyl of 0 to 8        carbon atoms, inclusive, which may be straight chain or        branched, provided when R₁ is 0, then R₁ is a hydrogen atom;

R₃₀₄ is

-   -   (a) H;    -   (b) an alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive, which may be a        straight chain or branched;

R₃₀₅ is

wherein Z_(i)Z_(ii), Z_(iii), Z_(iv) and Z_(v) are defined as above;

R₃₀₆ is

-   -   (a) H;    -   (b) an alkyl from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, straight chain        or branched;

wherein Y₃₀₁ is —OH, methyl, —SH, an alkyl of 2 to 4 carbon atoms,inclusive, straight chain or branched, an alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms,inclusive, or (CH)_(p)(Z)_(q), where p+q=3, p=0 to 3, q=0 to 3 and Z iscyano, nitro or a halogen; and

T is O or S, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

Lipoxin compounds suitable for use in the methods and compositions ofthis invention include those of formulae 51, 52, 53 or 54:

wherein:

each R₃₀₇ is independently selected from hydrogen and straight,branched, cyclic, saturated, or unsaturated alkyl having from 1 to 20carbon atoms;

R₃₀₈, R₃₀₉, R₃₁₀, R₃₁₉, and R₃₂₀ are independently selected from:

-   -   (a) hydrogen;    -   (b) straight, branched, cyclic, saturated, or unsaturated alkyl        having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms;    -   (c) substituted alkyl having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, wherein        the alkyl is substituted with one or more substituents selected        from halo, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino,        dialkylamino, acylamino, arylamino, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino,        alkylthio, arylthio, carboxy, carboxamido, carboalkoxy, aryl,        and heteroaryl;    -   (d) substituted aryl or heteroaryl, wherein the aryl or        heteroaryl is substituted with one or more substituents selected        from alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, halo, aryl, heteroaryl,        carboxyl, and carboxamido; and    -   (e) Z—Y, wherein:

Z is selected from a straight, branched, cyclic, saturated, orunsaturated alkyl having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms; substituted loweralkyl, wherein the alkyl is substituted with one or more substituentsselected from halo, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino,dialkylamino, acylamino, arylamino, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino,alkylthio, arylthio, carboxy, carboxamido, carboalkoxy, aryl, andheteroaryl; and substituted aryl or heteroaryl, wherein the aryl orheteroaryl is substituted with one or more substituents selected fromalkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, carboxyl, andcarboxamido; and

Y is selected from hydrogen; alkyl; cycloalkyl; carboxyl; carboxamido;aryl; heteroaryl; substituted aryl or heteroaryl, wherein the aryl orheteroaryl is substituted with one or more substituents selected fromalkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, carboxyl, andcarboxamido; and

R₃₁₁ to R₃₁₈ are independently selected from:

-   -   (a) hydrogen;    -   (b) halo;    -   (c) straight, branched, cyclic, saturated, or unsaturated alkyl        having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms;    -   (d) substituted alkyl having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, wherein        the alkyl is substituted with one or more substituents selected        from halo, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino,        dialkylamino, acylamino, arylamino, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino,        alkylthio, arylthio, carboxy, carboxamido, carboalkoxy, aryl,        and heteroaryl;    -   (e) substituted aryl or heteroaryl, wherein the aryl or        heteroaryl is substituted with one or more substituents selected        from alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, halo, aryl, heteroaryl,        carboxyl, and carboxamido; or

R₃₀₈ to R₃₂₀ are independently a bond that forms a carbon-carbon doublebond, a carbon-carbon triple bond, or a ring with the lipoxin backbone;or

any two of R₃₀₇ to R₃₂₀ are taken together with the atoms to which theyare bound and optionally to 1 to 6 oxygen atoms, 1 to 6 nitrogen atoms,or both 1 to 6 oxygen atoms and 1 to 6 nitrogen atoms, to form a ringcontaining 3 to 20 atoms.

Lipoxin compounds suitable for use in the methods and compositions ofthis invention include those of formula 55:

wherein:

R₄₀₁ is selected from:

R₄₀₂ is selected from:

X₁₀ is R₄₁₁, OR₄₁₁, or SR₄₁₁;

R₄₁₁ is

-   -   (a) a hydrogen atom;    -   (b) an alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which may be        straight chain or branched;    -   (c) a cycloalkyl of 3 to 10 carbon atoms;    -   (d) an aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbon atoms;    -   (e) phenyl;    -   (f) substituted phenyl

-   -   -   wherein Z_(i)Z_(ii), Z_(iii), Z_(iv) and Z_(v) are each            independently selected from —NO₂, —CN, —C(═O)—R₄₁₁, —SO₃H, a            hydrogen atom, halogen, methyl, —OR_(x), wherein R_(x) is 1            to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which may be a straight chain            or branched, and hydroxyl; wherein when any of Z_(i)Z_(ii),            Z_(iii), Z_(iv) or Z_(v) is C(═O)—R₄₁₁, said Z_(i)Z_(ii),            Z_(iii), Z_(iv) or Z_(v) is not substituted with another            C(═O)—R₄₁₁.

    -   (g) a detectable label molecule; or

    -   (h) a straight or branched chain alkenyl of 2 to 8 carbon atoms,        inclusive;        Q₁ is (C═O), SO₂ or (CN);        Q₃ is O, S or NH;        one of R₄₁₂ and R₄₁₃ is a hydrogen atom and the other is        selected from:

    -   (a) H;

    -   (b) an alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which can be        straight chain or branched;

    -   (c) a cycloalkyl of 3 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive;

    -   (d) an alkenyl of 2 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which can be        straight chain or branched; or

    -   (e) R₄₃₁Q₂R₄₃₂ wherein Q₂ is —O— or —S—; wherein R₄₃₁ is        alkylene of 0 to 6 carbons atoms, inclusive, which can be        straight chain or branched and wherein R₄₃₁ is alkyl of 0 to 8        carbon atoms, inclusive, which can be straight chain or        branched;        R_(413a) and R_(413b) are each independently:

    -   (a) H;

    -   (b) an alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which can be        straight chain or branched;

    -   (c) a cycloalkyl of 3 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive;

    -   (d) an alkenyl of 2 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, which can be        straight chain or branched; or

    -   (e) R₄₃₁Q₂R₄₃₂ wherein R₄₃₁, Q₂, and R₄₃₂ are as defined above;        R₄₁₄ is

    -   (a) H;

    -   (b) an alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive, can be straight        chain or branched;        R₄₁₅ is

    -   (a) an alkyl of 1 to 9 carbon atoms which can be straight chain        or branched;

    -   (b) —(CH₂)—R_(i)        wherein n=0 to 4 and R_(i) is        (i) a cycloalkyl of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive;        (ii) a phenyl; or        (iii) substituted phenyl

wherein Z_(i) through Z_(v) are as defined above;

-   -   (b) R₄₃₁Q₂R₄₃₂, wherein R₄₃₁, Q₂, and R₄₃₂ are as defined above;    -   (c) —C(R_(iii))(R_(iv))—R_(i),        wherein R_(iii) and R_(iv) are each independently:    -   (i) a hydrogen atom;    -   (ii) (CH)_(p)(Z)_(q), wherein Z, p, and q are as defined above;        (e) a haloalkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, and 1 to 6        halogen atoms, inclusive, straight chain or branched;        R₄₁₆ is    -   (a) H;    -   (b) an alkyl from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, straight chain        or branched;    -   (c) a halogen;        one of Y₄₀₁ or Y₄₀₂ is —OH, methyl, or —SH, and wherein the        other is selected from:    -   (a) H;    -   (b) (CH)_(p)(Z)_(q) where p+q=3, p=0 to 3, q=0 to 3 and each Z,        independently, is cyano, nitro or a halogen;    -   (c) an alkyl of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, straight chain        or branched; or    -   (d) an alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive,        or Y₄₀₁ and Y₄₀₂ taken together are:    -   (d) ═NH; or    -   (e) ═O;        one of Y₄₀₃ or Y₄₀₄ is —OH, methyl, or —SH, and wherein the        other is selected from:    -   (a) H;    -   (b) (CH)_(p)(Z)_(q) wherein Z, p, and q are as defined above;    -   (c) an alkyl of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, straight chain        or branched; or    -   (d) an alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive,        or Y₄₀₁ and Y₄₀₂ taken together are:    -   (a) ═NH; or    -   (b) ═O;        one of Y₄₀₅ or Y₄₀₆ is —OH, methyl, or —SH, and wherein the        other is selected from:    -   (a) H    -   (b) (CH)_(p)(Z)_(q) wherein Z, p, and q are as defined above;    -   (c) an alkyl of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, straight chain        or branched; or    -   (d) an alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive,        or Y₄₀₁ and Y₄₀₂ taken together are:    -   (a) ═NH; or    -   (b) ═O;        R₄₂₁ is    -   (a) H; or    -   (b) alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms;        R₄₂₂ and R₄₂₃ are each independently:    -   (a) H;    -   (b) a hydroxyl, or a thiol;    -   (c) a methyl or a halomethyl;    -   (d) a halogen; or    -   (e) an alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;        R₄₂₄ and R₄₂₅ are each independently:    -   (a) H;    -   (b) a hydroxyl, or a thiol;    -   (c) a methyl or a halomethyl;    -   (d) a halogen;    -   (e) an alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms; or    -   (f) an alkyl or haloalkyl of 2 to 4 carbon atoms inclusive,        which can be straight chain or branched; and        R₄₂₆ is    -   (a) a substituted phenyl

-   -    wherein Z_(i) through Z_(v) are as defined above;    -   (b) a substituted phenoxy

-   -    wherein Z_(i) through Z_(v) are as defined above; or    -   (c)

-   -    wherein Z_(i) through Z_(v) are as defined above.

Lipoxin compounds suitable for use in the methods and compositions ofthis invention include those of formula 56:

wherein:

E is hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino or —OM,where M is a cation selected from ammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, andthe cations of sodium, potassium, magnesium and zinc;

W is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, halo, hydroxy,alkoxy, aryloxy, carboxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, acylamino,carboxamido, or sulfonamide;

each of R₅₀₁-R₅₀₃ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl,acyl or alkoxyacyl;

n is 0, 1 or 2;

m is 1 or 2; and

the two substituents on the phenyl ring are ortho, meta, or para.

Lipoxin compounds suitable for use in the methods and compositions ofthis invention include those of formula 57:

wherein:

I is selected from: —C(O)-E, —SO₂-E, —PO(OR)-E, where E is hydroxy,alkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, or —OM, where M is acation selected from ammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na, K, Mg, and Zn;and R is hydroxyl or alkoxy

J′ and K′ are linkers independently selected from a chain of up to 20atoms and a ring containing up to 20 atoms, provided that J′ and K′ canindependently include one or more nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur orphosphorous atoms, and further provided that J′ and K′ can independentlyinclude one or more substituents selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, chloro, iodo, bromo, fluoro, hydroxy, alkoxy,aryloxy, carboxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, acylamino,carboxamido, cyano, oxo, thio, alkylthio, arylthio, acylthio,alkylsulfonate, arylsulfonate, phosphoryl, and sulfonyl, and furtherprovided that J′ and K′ can also contain one or more fused carbocyclic,heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl rings, and provided that linkers and K′are connected to the adjacent C(R)OR group via a carbon atom or aC-heteroatom bond where the heteroatom is oxygen, sulfur, phosphorous ornitrogen;

G is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl,chloro, iodo, bromo, fluoro, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, carboxy, amino,alkylamino, dialkylamino, acyl amino, and carboxamido.

Re, Rf and Rg, are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl,heteroaryl, acyl, silyl, alkoxyacyl and aminoacyl;

R₆₀₁, R₆₀₂ and R₆₀₃ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl,aryl and heteroaryl, provided that R₆₀₁, R₆₀₂ and R₆₀₃ can independentlybe connected to linkers J′ or K′;

R₆₀₄ and R₆₀₅ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, fluoro, and provided that R₆₀₄ and R₆₀₅ canbe joined together to form a carbocyclic, heterocyclic or aromatic ring,and further provided that R₆₀₄ and R₆₀₅ can be replaced by a bond toform a triple bond.

Other compounds suitable for use in the methods and compositions of theinvention are the oxylipins described in international applications WO2006055965, WO 2007090162, and WO2008103753 the compounds in which areincorporated herein by reference. Examples of such compounds are thoseof formulae 58-132, as shown in Table 2. These compounds include longchain omega-6 fatty acids, docosapentaenoic acid (DPAn-6) (compounds58-73) and docosatetraenoic acid (DTAn-6) (compounds 74-83), and theomega-3 counterpart of DPAn-6, docosapentaenoic acid (DPAn-3) (compounds84-97). Further compounds are the docosanoids 98-115, the γ-linolenicacids (GLA) (compounds 116-122), and the stearidonic acids (SDA)(compounds 123-132).

TABLE 2 10,17- Dihydroxy DPAn-6 (58)

16,17- Dihydroxy DPAn-6 (59)

4,5- Dihydroxy DPAn-6 (60)

7,17- Dihydroxy DPAn-6 (61)

7-Hydroxy DPAn-6 (62)

10-hydroxy DPAn-6 (63)

13-Hydroxy DPAn-6 (64)

17-hydroxy DPAn-6 (65)

4,5,17- Trihydroxy DPAn-6 (66)

7,16,17- Trihydroxy DPAn-6 (67)

8-Hydroxy DPAn-6 (68)

14-Hydroxy DPAn-6 (69)

13,17- Dihydroxy DPAn-6 (70)

7,14- Dihydroxy DPAn-6 (71)

8,14- Dihydroxy DPAn-6 (72)

11-Hydroxy DPAn-6 (73)

10,17- Dihydroxy- DTAn-6 (74)

16,17- Dihydroxy- DTAn-6 (75)

4,5- Dihydroxy- DTAn-6 (76)

7,17- Dihydroxy- DTAn-6 (77)

7-Hydroxy- DTAn-6 (78)

10-Hydroxy- DTAn-6 (79)

13-Hydroxy- DTAn-6 (80)

17-Hydroxy- DTAn-6 (81)

4,5,17- Trihydroxy- DTAn-6 (82)

7,16,17- Trihydroxy- DTAn-6 (83)

10,17- Dihydroxy DPAn-3 (84)

10,20- Dihydroxy DPAn-3 (85)

13,20- Dihydroxy DPAn-3 (86)

16,17- Dihydroxy DPAn-3 (87)

7,17- Dihydroxy DPAn-3 (88)

7-Hydroxy DPAn-3 (89)

10-Hydroxy DPAn-3 (90)

13-Hydroxy DPAn-3 (91)

17-Hydroxy DPAn-3 (92)

7,16,17- Trihydroxy DPAn-3 (93)

16-Hydroxy DPAn-3 (94)

11-Hydroxy DPAn-3 (95)

14-Hydroxy DPAn-3 (96)

8,14- Dihydroxy DPAn-3 (97)

10,11-Epoxy DHA (98)

13,14- Dihydroxy DHA (99)

13,14-Epoxy DHA (100)

19,20-Epoxy DHA (101)

7,8-Epoxy DHA (102)

4,5-Epoxy- 17-OH DPA (103)

7,16,17- Trihydroxy DTAn-3 (104)

16,17- Dihidroxy DTAn-3 (105)

10,16,17- Trihydroxy DTRAn-6 (106)

16,17- Dihydroxy DTRAn-6 (107)

7,16,17- Trihydroxy DTRAn-6 (108)

15-epi- lipoxin A4 (109)

16,17-epoxy DHA (110)

7,8-epoxy DPA (111)

10,11 epoxy DPA (112)

19,20 epoxy DPA (113)

7-hydroxy DHA (114)

13,14 epoxy DPA (115)

6-hydroxy GLA (116)

10-hydroxy GLA (117)

7-hydroxy GLA (118)

12-hydroxy GLA (119)

9-hydroxy GLA (120)

13-hydroxy GLA (121)

6,13 dihydroxy GLA (122)

6-hydroxy SDA (123)

10-hydroxy SDA (124)

7-hydroxy SDA (125)

12-hydroxy SDA (126)

9-hydroxy SDA (127)

13-hydroxy SDA (128)

15-hydroxy SDA (129)

16-hydroxy SDA (130)

6,13 dihydroxy SDA (131)

6,16 dihydroxy SDA (132)

Other oxylipin compounds that are suitable for use in methods andcompositions of the invention include analogs of the compounds shown inTable 2. Such compounds include but are not limited to those analogswherein one or more double bonds are replaced by triple bonds, thosewherein one or more carboxy groups are derivatized to form esters,amides or salts, those wherein the hydroxyl-bearing carbons are furtherderivatized (with, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted, branchedor unbranched alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl group, substituted orunsubstituted aryl group, substituted or unsubstituted, branched orunbranched alkylaryl group, halogen atom) to form tertiary alcohols (orethers, esters, or other derivatives thereof), those wherein one or morehydroxyl groups are derivatized to form esters or protected alcohols, orthose having combinations of any of the foregoing modifications.

Further oxylipin compounds suitable for use in methods and compositionsof the invention include the following: isolated docosanoids ofdocosapentaenoic acid (DPAn-6); monohydroxy, dihydroxy, and trihydroxyderivatives of DPAn-6; isolated docosanoids of docosapentaenoic acid(DPAn-3); monohydroxy, dihydroxy, and trihydroxy derivatives of DPAn-3;isolated docosanoids of docosapentaenoic acid (DTAn-6); or monohydroxy,dihydroxy, and trihydroxy derivatives of DTAn-6.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides methods oftreating or preventing an ophthalmic condition (such as dry eye),comprising administering an effective amount of any one or more of thecompounds described above (e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, acompound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxincompound, or an oxylipin compound), e.g., as an aqueous solution asdescribed herein, such as topically to the eye, e.g., as eye drops. Incertain such embodiments, the methods of treating or preventing anophthalmic condition comprise administering greater than 6 nanomoles ofany of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound of any offormulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound) per treatedeye per day, e.g., up to 550 nanomoles per treated eye per day, such asfrom 6 to 400 nanomoles, from 6 to 300 nanomoles, from 6 to 250nanomoles, from 6 to 200 nanomoles, from 6 to 150, or from 6 to 100nanomoles of any of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound ofany of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound) per treatedeye per day. In certain such embodiments, the methods of treating orpreventing an ophthalmic condition comprise administering greater than 7nanomoles of any of the compounds shown above (e.g., a compound of anyof formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound) per treatedeye per day, such as greater than 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, 25,30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 nanomoles of any of the compounds shown above(e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, acompound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipincompound) per treated eye per day, e.g., up to 100, 150, 200, 250, 300,400, or even up to 550 nanomoles per treated eye per day. For example,the methods of treating or preventing an ophthalmic condition compriseadministering from 7 to 550 nanomoles of any of the compounds describedabove (e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formulaA, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or anoxylipin compound) per treated eye per day, such as from 7 to 400nanomoles, from 7 to 300 nanomoles, from 7 to 250 nanomoles, from 7 to200 nanomoles, from 7 to 150, or from 7 to 100 nanomoles of any of thecompounds described above (e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, acompound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxincompound, or an oxylipin compound) per treated eye per day. In certainembodiments, the methods of treating or preventing an ophthalmiccondition comprise administering from 10 to 550 nanomoles of any of thecompounds described above (e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, acompound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxincompound, or an oxylipin compound) per treated eye per day, such as from10 to 400 nanomoles, from 10 to 300 nanomoles, from 10 to 250 nanomoles,from 10 to 200 nanomoles, from 10 to 150, or from 10 to 100 nanomoles ofany of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound of any offormulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound) per treatedeye per day. In certain embodiments, the methods of treating orpreventing an ophthalmic condition comprise administering from 15 to 550nanomoles of any of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound ofany of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound) per treatedeye per day, such as from 15 to 400 nanomoles, from 15 to 300 nanomoles,from 15 to 250 nanomoles, from 15 to 200 nanomoles, from 15 to 150, orfrom 15 to 100 nanomoles of any of the compounds described above (e.g.,a compound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compoundof any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipincompound) per treated eye per day. In certain embodiments, the methodsof treating or preventing an ophthalmic condition may compriseadministering the dosages of any of the compounds described above (e.g.,a compound of the invention, such as a compound of any of formulae I-IX,a compound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, alipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound) as set forth above over thecourse of a day through any suitable dosing regimen. Suitable dosingregimens may include once daily dosing, twice daily dosing, three timesdaily dosing, four times daily dosing, and any other suitable dosingregimen such that the net effect throughout the course of the day isadministering the total dosages per eye per day as set forth above. Incertain embodiments, suitable dosing regimens further include once everytwo days dosing, such as every other day, or once every three daysdosing, such as every third day, such that the net effect throughout thecourse of the day of dosing is administering at least the total dosagesper eye per day as set forth above.

As a particular example, the present invention provides methods oftreating or preventing an ophthalmic condition (such as dry eye),comprising administering an effective amount of compound 1001, e.g., asan aqueous solution as described herein, such as topically to the eye,e.g., as eye drops. In certain such embodiments, the methods of treatingor preventing an ophthalmic condition comprise administering greaterthan 2 micrograms of compound 1001 per treated eye per day, e.g., up to175 micrograms per treated eye per day, such as from 2 to 150micrograms, from 2 to 125 micrograms, from 2 to 100 micrograms, from 2to 75 micrograms, from 2 to 50 micrograms, or from 2 to 25 micrograms ofcompound 1001 per treated eye per day. In certain such embodiments, themethods of treating or preventing an ophthalmic condition compriseadministering greater than 2.5 micrograms of compound 1001 per treatedeye per day, such as greater than 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7,7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, 10, 10.5, 11, 11.5, 12, 12.5, 13, 13.5, 14, 14.5,15, 15.5, 16, 16.5, 17, 17.5, 18, 18.5, 19, 19.5, or 20 micrograms ofcompound 1001 per treated eye per day, e.g., up to 25, 50, 75, 100, 125,150, or even up to 175 micrograms per treated eye per day. In certainembodiments, the methods of treating or preventing an ophthalmiccondition comprise administering from 2.5 to 175 micrograms of compound1001 per treated eye per day, such as from 2.5 to 150 micrograms, from2.5 to 125 micrograms, from 2.5 to 100 micrograms, from 2.5 to 75micrograms, from 2.5 to 50 micrograms, or from 2.5 to 25 micrograms ofcompound 1001 per treated eye per day. In certain embodiments, themethods of treating or preventing an ophthalmic condition compriseadministering from 3 to 175 micrograms of compound 1001 per treated eyeper day, such as from 3 to 150 micrograms, from 3 to 125 micrograms,from 3 to 100 micrograms, from 3 to 75 micrograms, from 3 to 50micrograms, or from 3 to 25 micrograms of compound 1001 per treated eyeper day. In certain embodiments, the methods of treating or preventingan ophthalmic condition comprise administering from 4 to 175 microgramsof compound 1001 per treated eye per day, such as from 4 to 150micrograms, from 4 to 125 micrograms, from 4 to 100 micrograms, from 4to 75 micrograms, from 4 to 50 micrograms, or from 4 to 25 micrograms ofcompound 1001 per treated eye per day. In certain embodiments, themethods of treating or preventing an ophthalmic condition compriseadministering from 5 to 175 micrograms of compound 1001 per treated eyeper day, such as from 5 to 150 micrograms, from 5 to 125 micrograms,from 5 to 100 micrograms, from 5 to 75 micrograms, from 5 to 50micrograms, or from 5 to 25 micrograms of compound 1001 per treated eyeper day. In certain embodiments, the methods of treating or preventingan ophthalmic condition may comprise administering the dosages ofcompound 1001 as set forth above over the course of a day through anysuitable dosing regimen. Suitable dosing regimens may include once dailydosing, twice daily dosing, three times daily dosing, four times dailydosing, and any other suitable dosing regimen, such that the net effectthroughout the course of the day is administering the total dosages pereye per day of compound 1001 as set forth above. In certain embodiments,suitable dosing regimens further include once every two days dosing,such as every other day, or once every three days dosing, such as everythird day, such that the net effect throughout the course of the day ofdosing is administering at least the total dosages per eye per day ofcompound 1001 as set forth above.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a pharmaceuticalpreparation suitable for treating or preventing an ophthalmic condition(such as dry eye) in a human patient, comprising any one or more of thecompounds shown above (e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, acompound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxincompound, or an oxylipin compound), and one or more pharmaceuticallyacceptable excipients, e.g., as an aqueous solution suitable for topicaladministration to the eye, such as eye drops. In certain embodiments,the pharmaceutical preparation has a concentration over 90 micromolar ofany of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound of any offormulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound), e.g., from90 micromolar to 7000 micromolar, such as from 90 to 5000 micromolar, 90to 3000 micromolar, 90 to 2000 micromolar, or 90 to 1000 micromolar ofany of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound of any offormulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound). In certainembodiments, the a pharmaceutical preparation has a concentration ofgreater than 100 micromolar of any of the compounds described above(e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, acompound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipincompound), such as greater than 150 micromolar, greater than 200micromolar, greater than 250 micromolar, greater than 300 micromolar,greater than 350 micromolar, greater than 400 micromolar, greater than450 micromolar, greater than 500 micromolar, greater than 550micromolar, greater than 600 micromolar, greater than 650 micromolar,greater than 700 micromolar, greater than 750 micromolar, or greaterthan 800 micromolar of any of the compounds described above (e.g., acompound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound ofany one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound),e.g., up to 1000 micromolar, up to 2000 micromolar, up to 3000micromolar, up to 5000 micromolar, or even up to 7000 micromolar. Forexample, the pharmaceutical preparation may have a concentration from100 micromolar to 7000 micromolar of any of the compounds describedabove (e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formulaA, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or anoxylipin compound), such as from 100 to 5000 micromolar, 100 to 3000micromolar, 100 to 2000 micromolar, or 100 to 1000 micromolar of any ofthe compounds described above (e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX,a compound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, alipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound). In certain embodiments, thepharmaceutical preparation has a concentration from 150 micromolar to7000 micromolar of any of the compounds described above (e.g., acompound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound ofany one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound),such as from 150 to 5000 micromolar, 150 to 3000 micromolar, 150 to 2000micromolar, or 150 to 1000 micromolar of any of the compounds describedabove (e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formulaA, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or anoxylipin compound). In certain embodiments, the pharmaceuticalpreparation has a concentration from 90 micromolar to 7000 micromolar ofany of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound of any offormulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound), such as 250to 5000 micromolar, 250 to 3000 micromolar, 250 to 2000 micromolar, or250 to 1000 micromolar of any of the compounds described above (e.g., acompound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound ofany one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound).

As a particular example, the present invention provides a pharmaceuticalpreparation suitable for treating or preventing an ophthalmic condition(such as dry eye) in a human patient, comprising compound 1001 and oneor more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, e.g., as an aqueoussolution suitable for topical administration to the eye, such as eyedrops. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical preparation has aconcentration over 30 micrograms/milliliter (μg/mL) of compound 1001,e.g., from 30 μg/mL to 2000 μg/mL, such as from 30 μg/mL to 1500 μg/mL,30 μg/mL to 1000 μg/mL, 30 μg/mL to 750 μg/mL, 30 μg/mL to 500 μg/mL, 30μg/mL to 400 μg/mL, or 30 μg/mL to 350 μg/mL of compound 1001. Incertain embodiments, the pharmaceutical preparation has a concentrationof greater than 40 μg/mL of compound 1001, such as greater than 50μg/mL, greater than 60 μg/mL, greater than 70 μg/mL, greater than 75μg/mL, greater than 100 μg/mL, greater than 125 μg/mL, greater than 150μg/mL, greater than 175 μg/mL, greater than 200 μg/mL, greater than 225μg/mL, or greater than 250 μg/mL of compound 1001, e.g., up to 350μg/mL, up to 400 μg/mL, up to 500 μg/mL, up to 750 μg/mL, up to 1000μg/mL, up to 1500 μg/mL, or even up to 2000 μg/mL. For example, thepharmaceutical preparation may have a concentration from 40 μg/mL to2000 μg/mL of compound 1001, such as from 40 μg/mL to 1500 μg/mL, 40μg/mL to 1000 μg/mL, 40 μg/mL to 750 μg/mL, 40 μg/mL to 500 μg/mL, 40μg/mL to 400 μg/mL, or 40 μg/mL to 350 μg/mL of compound 1001. Incertain embodiments, the pharmaceutical preparation has a concentrationfrom 50 μg/mL to 2000 μg/mL of compound 1001, such as from 50 μg/mL to1500 μg/mL, 50 μg/mL to 1000 μg/mL, 50 μg/mL to 750 μg/mL, 50 μg/mL to500 μg/mL, 50 μg/mL to 400 μg/mL, or 50 μg/mL to 350 μg/mL of compound1001. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical preparation has aconcentration from 60 μg/mL to 2000 μg/mL of compound 1001, such as from60 μg/mL to 1500 μg/mL, 60 μg/mL to 1000 μg/mL, 60 μg/mL to 750 μg/mL,60 μg/mL to 500 μg/mL, 60 μg/mL to 400 μg/mL, or 60 μg/mL to 350 μg/mLof compound 1001. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical preparationhas a concentration from 75 μg/mL to 2000 μg/mL of compound 1001, suchas from 75 μg/mL to 1500 μg/mL, 75 μg/mL to 1000 μg/mL, 75 μg/mL to 750μg/mL, 75 μg/mL to 500 μg/mL, 75 μg/mL to 400 μg/mL, or 75 μg/mL to 350μg/mL of compound 1001.

In certain embodiments of the methods of treating or preventing anophthalmic condition (such as dry eye), comprising administering aneffective amount of any one or more of the compounds described above(e.g., a compound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, acompound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipincompound), e.g., as an aqueous solution as described herein, such astopically to the eye, e.g., as eye drops, compound 1001 is the preferredcompound.

In certain embodiments of any of the foregoing pharmaceuticalpreparations (e.g., any of the pharmaceutical preparations describedabove comprising a compound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound offormula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound,or an oxylipin compound, such as compound 1001, and one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients), the pharmaceutical preparationis an aqueous solution suitable for topical administration to the eyewherein the solution has a pH in the range of 5.5 to 7.4, such as from5.5 to 7.0, or from 5.5 to 6.5, or from 5.5 to 6.0. In certainembodiments of any of the foregoing pharmaceutical preparations (e.g.,any of the pharmaceutical preparations described above comprising acompound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound ofany one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound,such as compound 1001, and one or more pharmaceutically acceptableexcipients), the pharmaceutical preparation is an aqueous solutionsuitable for topical administration to the eye wherein the solution hasa pH in the range of 5.0 to 7.4, such as from 5.0 to 7.0, or from 5.0 to6.5, such as from 5.0 to 6.0, or from 5.0 to 5.5. In certain embodimentsof the foregoing, the solution further comprises one or moresurfactants, one or more demulscents, and/or one or more emulsifiers,such as polysorbate 80, pluronic F-147, tyloxapol, polyvinylpyrrolidone(such as polyvinylpyrrolidone having an average molecular weight of360,000, e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone K-90, Chemical Abstracts ServiceRegistry No. 9003-39-8), mineral oil or castor oil. In certainembodiments, the pharmaceutical preparation is substantially free ofpreservatives.

In certain embodiments of the present invention, a pharmaceuticalpreparation as set forth above (e.g., having a concentration as setforth above), may be administered using any suitable dosing regimen forthe treatment or prevention of an ophthalmic condition. Suitable dosingregimens for an aqueous eye drop solution include administering thepharmaceutical preparation once, twice, three times, or four times perday to an affected eye. In certain embodiments, suitable dosing regimensfor an aqueous eye drop solution further include once every two daysdosing, such as every other day, or once every three days dosing, suchas every third day, to an affected eye. In certain embodiments, anyparticular incidence of administration of a pharmaceutical preparationas set forth above (e.g., having a concentration as set forth above),may comprise administering one or more drops of the pharmaceuticalpreparation to an affected eye. In certain such embodiments, anyparticular incidence of administration of a pharmaceutical preparationas set forth above (e.g., having a concentration as set forth above),may comprise administering two, three, four, or five drops of thepharmaceutical preparation to an affected eye. The present inventionfurther contemplates any and all combinations of the foregoing.

Examples of ophthalmic conditions that may be treated by administrationof a compound or formulation of the invention, include, but are notlimited to, AIDS-related retinal disorders; age-related maculardegeneration; alkaline erosive keratoconjunctivitis; allergic keratitis;anterior ischemic optic neuropathy; anterior uveitis (iridocyclitis);Behcet's disease; blepharitis; seborrheic blepharitis; canaliculitis;cataract; central serous chorioretinopathy; chorioiditis; chronicuveitis; Coats' disease; conjunctivitis (e.g., infectiousconjunctivitis, neonatal conjunctivitis, non-infectious conjunctivitis,and allergic conjunctivitis); contact lens-induced keratoconjunctivitis;contact eczema; corneal ulcer (e.g., Mooren's ulcer, corneal ulcersubsequent to chronic rheumatoid arthritis or collagen disease,Terrien's marginal degeneration, catarrhal corneal ulcer, infectiouscorneal ulcer); crystalline retinopathy; cyclitis; edema (e.g., cystoidmacular edema); dacryoadenitis; dacryocystitis; degenerative myopia;degenerative retinoschisis; diabetic keratophathy; diabetic macularedema; diabetic retinopathy; dry eye disease (e.g., dry eye of thelacrimal system or dry eye of the cornea); dry age-related maculardegeneration; endophthalmitis; episcleritis; exudative macular edema;Fuchs' Dystrophy; giant cell arteritis; giant papillary conjunctivitis;glaucoma (e.g., primary open angle glaucoma, primary angle closureglaucoma, secondary open angle glaucoma, secondary angle closureglaucoma, and childhood glaucoma); glaucoma surgery failure; graftversus host disease of the eye (often a form of dry eye); herpes zoster(shingles); hypertensive retinopathy; inflammation after cataractsurgery; iridocorneal endothelial syndrome; iridocytis; iritis;keratitis (e.g., infectious keratitis, non-infectious keratitis, andneuroparalytic keratitis); keratoconjunctiva sicca; keratoconjunctivalinflammatory disease; keratoconus; keratopathy; lattice dystrophy;map-dot-fingerprint dystrophy; necrotic keratitis; neovascular diseasesinvolving the retina, uveal tract or cornea such as neovascularglaucoma, corneal neovascularization (inflammatory, transplantation,developmental hypoplasia of the iris), neovascularization resultingfollowing a combined vitrectomy and lensectomy, neovascularization ofthe optic nerve, and neovascularization due to penetration of the eye orcontusive ocular injury; non-infectious uveitis; ocular herpes; ocularrosacea; ophthalmic infections (e.g., corneal herpes, bacterialkeratitis, bacterial conjunctivitis, mycotic keratitis, acanthamebickeratitis, infectious endophthalmitis, infectious corneal ulcer,inflammation of the conjunctiva or cornea by staphylococci,streptococci, enterococci, euterococci, bacillus, corynebacterium,chlamydia, and neisseria); ophthalmic pemphigoid; optic disc drusen;optic neuritis; panuveitis; papilledema; papillitis; pars planitis;persistent macular edema; phacoanaphylaxis; posterior uveitis(chorioentinitis); post-operative inflammation (e.g., post-LASIKinflammation of the cornea); proliferative diabetic retinopathy;proliferative sickle cell retinopathy; proliferative vitreoretinopathy;retinal artery occlusion; retinal detachment; retinal vasculitis;retinal vein occlusion; retinitis pigmentosa; retinopathy ofprematurity; rubeosis iritis; scleritis; Stevens-Johnson syndrome(erythema multiforme major); sympathetic ophthalmia; temporal arteritis;toxic retinopathy; uveitis (e.g., anterior uveitis or posterioruveitis); vernal conjunctivitis; vitamin A insufficiency-inducedkeratomalacia; vitreitis; and wet age-related macular degeneration.

Diseases causing dry eye include Riley-Day syndrome, Shy-Dragersyndrome, Sjogren syndrome, sarcoidosis, amyloidosis, sequel a ofradiotherapy, lagophthalmia, avitaminosis A, Stevens-Johnson syndrome,ocular pemphigoid, marginal blepharitis, meibomitis, sequela ofintraocular surgery, contact-lens affection, diabetic cornealepitheliopathy, dry eye due to VDT operation, graft versus host disease,and the like. Disorders caused by corneal infective disease include, forexample, viral epitheliopathy and the like. Stem cell depletionsyndromes include Stevens-Johnson syndrome, ocular pemphigoid, thermalor chemical burn, drug toxicity of idoxuridine (IDU) and therapeuticagents for glaucoma, and the like.

The present invention provides a method of inhibiting COX-2 or TNF inthe eye in a patient comprising administering to said patient a compoundof the invention. The present invention further provides a method ofprotecting against goblet cell loss in the eye in a patient comprisingadministering to said patient a compound of the invention.

Compounds as described herein may also inhibit inflammatory mediators inthe cornea, such as TNF, IL-1a, IL-1b, IL-6, and IL-8. Accordingly,these compounds may be useful in the treatment of dry eyes diseases,age-related macular degeneration, retinopathy of prematurity, uveitis,and glaucoma.

Compounds as described herein may also inhibit COX-2 in the cornea.Accordingly, these compounds may be useful in the treatment of dry eyesdiseases.

Compounds as described herein may also guard against goblet cell loss.Accordingly, these compounds may be useful in the treatment of dry eyediseases, age-related macular degeneration, retinopathy of prematurity,retinitis pigmentosa, and glaucoma. Compounds as described herein mayalso induce increases in tear production and density of superficialepithelial cells, two endpoints relevant to the treatment of dry eye.

Compounds as described herein may also reduce vascular leakage.Accordingly, these compounds may be useful in the treatment ofage-related macular degeneration.

Compounds as described herein may also inhibit CD11b+ cells. Animalmodels of dry eye show an increase in CD11b+ cells suggesting theincreased presence of leukocytes in corneas. Accordingly, thesecompounds may be useful in the treatment of dry eye by decreasing thearrival of leukocytes induced by dry eye.

Compounds as described herein may also prevent pigmented retinalepithelium destruction. Accordingly, these compounds may be useful inthe treatment of age-related macular degeneration, retinopathy ofprematurity, retinitis pigmentosa, and glaucoma.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with other agents suitable for the treatment orprevention of an ophthalmic condition. For example, the following agentsor classes of agents may be conjointly administered with a compound ofthe invention: doxocycline; decosahexanoic acid; angiogenesisinhibitors, e.g., VEGF inhibitors, such as pegaptanib sodium,bevacizumab, ranibizumab, AV-951, vandetanib, semaxanib, CBO-P11,axitinib, sorafenib, sunitinib, pazopanib, and TIMP3; anesthetics andpain killing agents such as lidocaine and related compounds andbenzodiazepam and related compounds; anti-cancer agents such as5-fluorouracil, adriamycin and related compounds; anti-inflammatoryagents such as 6-mannose phosphate; anti-fungal agents such asfluconazole and related compounds; anti-viral agents such as trisodiumphosphomonoformate, trifluorothymidine, acyclovir, ganciclovir, DDI,DDC, and AZT; cell transport/mobility impending agents such ascolchicine, vincristine, cytochalasin B, and related compounds;antiglaucoma drugs such as beta-blockers: timolol, betaxol, atenalol,etc; prostaglandins such as latanoprost and travoprost, etc.;immunological response modifiers such as muramyl dipeptide and relatedcompounds; peptides and proteins such as cyclosporin, insulin, growthhormones, insulin related growth factor, nerve growth factor (optionallyin further combination with decosahexanoic acid), heat shock proteinsand related compounds; estrogen treatments; corticosteroids such asdexamethasone, dexamethasone 21-phosphate, fluorometholone, medrysone,betamethasone, triamcinolone, triamcinolone acetonide, triminolone,prednisone, prednisolone, prednisolone 21-phosphate, prednisoloneacetate, hydrocortisone, hydrocortisone acetate, prednicarbate,deflazacort, halomethasone, tixocortol, prednylidene(21-diethylaminoacetate), prednival, paramethasone, prednisolone,methylprednisolone, meprednisone, mazipredone, isoflupredone,halopredone acetate, halcinonide, formocortal, flurandrenolide,fluprednisolone, flurprednidine acetate, fluperolone acetate,fluocortolone, fluocortin butyl, fluocinonide, fluocinolone,fluocinolone acetonide, flunisolide, flumethasone, fludrocortisone,fluclorinide, fluoromethalone, enoxolone, difluprednate, diflucortolone,diflorasone di acetate, desoximetasone (desoxymethasone), desonide,descinolone, cortivazol, corticosterone, cortisone, cloprednol,clocortolone, clobetasone, clobetasol, chloroprednisone, cafestol,budesonide, beclomethasone, amcinonide, allopregnane acetonide,alclometasone, 21-acetoxypregnenolone, tralonide, diflorasone acetate,deacylcortivazol, RU-26988, budesonide, and deacylcortivazol oxetanone.All of the above-cited corticosteroids are known compounds. Furtherinformation about the compounds may be found, for example, in The MerckIndex, Thirteenth Edition (2001), and the publications cited therein,the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated herein byreference. In certain embodiments, the cortico steroid is selected fromfluocinolone acetonide, triamcinolone acetonide, dexamethasone, andrelated compounds, or any combination thereof; and carbonic anhydazeinhibitors.

Further examples of agents or classes of agents may be conjointlyadministered with a compound of the invention include: DE-104;PF-04217329; PF-03187207; AL 37807; OPC-12759; chemotherapeutic agentssuch as mitomycin C; synthetic structural analogs of prostaglandin suchas bimatoprost; alpha 2 agonists such as brimonidine; carbonic anhydraseinhibitors such as dorzolamide HCl; prostaglandin derivatives andanalogs such as tafluprost and travoprost; NMDA antagonists such asmemantine; hyaluronic acid (e.g., sodium hyaluronate); corticosteroidssuch as loteprednol etabonate, difluprednate and rimexolone; antibioticssuch as doxycycline; agents that increase mucin such as ecabet andrebamipide; lubricants such as the combination of carboxymethylcellulosesodium and glycerin; A3 adenosine receptor agonists such as CF-101;immunomodulators such as thalidomide; TNFα antagonists such asetanercept; protein kinase C-b inhibitors such as ruboxistaurin;immunosuppressants such as sirolimus; PARP inhibitors such as AG-014699;neuroprotective thrombolytic agents such as microplasmin; hyaluronidase;oxidizing agents such as carbamide; somatostatin analogs such asoctreotide acetate; angiotensin II receptor antagonists such ascandesartan cilexetil; disease-modifying antirheumatic drugs such asleflunomide; AEB071; TNF antagonists such as adalimumab; CD11antagonists such as efalizumab; calcineurin inhibitors such as LX211;interferons such as interferon α-2a; and human alpha fetoproteins suchas MM-093.

In addition to the above agents, other agents are suitable foradministration to the eye and its surrounding tissues to produce a localor a systemic physiologic or pharmacologic beneficial effect. Suchagents may be conjointly administered with a compound of the invention.Examples of such agents include neuroprotectants, such as nimodipine andrelated compounds; antibiotics, such as tetracycline, chlortetracycline,bacitracin, neomycin, polymyxin, gramicidin, oxytetracycline,chloramphenicol, gentamycin, and erythromycin; antibacterials, such assulfonamides, sulfacetamide, sulfamethizole, and sulfisoxazole;antivirals, such as, idoxuridine; other antibacterial agents, such asnitrofurazone and sodium propionate; antiallergenics, such asantazoline, methapyriline, chlorpheniramine, pyrilamine, andprophenpyridamine; decongestants, such as phenylephrine, naphazoline,and tetrahydrazoline; miotics and anti-cholinesterase, such aspilocarpine, eserine salicylate, carbachol, di-isopropylfluorophosphate, phospholine iodine, and demecarium bromide; mydriatics,such as atropine sulfate, cyclopentolate, homatropine, scopolamine,tropicamide, eucatropine, and hydroxyamphetamine; sympathomimetics, suchas epinephrine; and prodrugs, such as those described in Design ofProdrugs, edited by Hans Bundgaard, Elsevier Scientific Publishing Co.,Amsterdam, 1985. Reference may be made to any standard pharmaceuticaltextbook such as Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Remington'sPharmaceutical Sciences. Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., USA 1985)for the identity of other agents.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with non-chemical methods suitable for thetreatment or prevention of an ophthalmic condition. In certainembodiments, different compounds of the invention may be conjointlyadministered with laser treatment (e.g., photocoagulation orphotodynamic therapy), macular translocation surgery or with devices(e.g., brimonidine tartrate implant).

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of an ophthalmic condition, such as the agentsidentified above.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of an ophthalmic condition or an agent suitable foradministration to the eye and its surrounding tissues to produce a localor a systemic physiologic or pharmacologic beneficial effect asmentioned above; and c) instructions for the administration of thecompound of the invention and the agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of an ophthalmic condition or agent suitable foradministration to the eye and its surrounding tissues to produce a localor a systemic physiologic or pharmacologic beneficial effect.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation e.g., for treating or preventing an ophthalmic        condition, inhibiting COX-2 or TNF in the eye, or protecting        against goblet cell loss in the eye.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of an ophthalmic condition, an agent suitable foradministration to the eye and its surrounding tissues to produce a localor a systemic physiologic or pharmacologic beneficial effect, ornon-chemical methods suitable for the treatment or prevention of anophthalmic condition as mentioned above. In certain embodiments, the kitfurther comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one ormore single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of an ophthalmic condition or an agent suitable foradministration to the eye and its surrounding tissues to produce a localor a systemic physiologic or pharmacologic beneficial effect asmentioned above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of an ophthalmic condition or an agent suitable for        administration to the eye and its surrounding tissues to produce        a local or a systemic physiologic or pharmacologic beneficial        effect as mentioned above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing an ophthalmic condition,        inhibiting COX-2 or TNF in the eye, or protecting against goblet        cell loss in the eye.

The present invention further provides a packaged pharmaceutical fordelivering eyedrops comprising a compound of any one of formulae I-IX, acompound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxincompound, or an oxylipin compound to an eye in need of treatment for anophthalmic condition. In certain such embodiments, the packagedpharmaceutical is configured to deliver the eyedrops in any of the dailydoses (e.g., any of the molar or weight quantities) set forth above byadministering one, two, three, four, or five eyedrops per eye, eitheronce, twice, three times, or four times daily, or even administeringonce every two days, such as every other day, or once every three days,such as every third day. One of skill in the art will recognize how tovary the drop volume (e.g., by altering the surface tension and/orviscosity of the solution and/or by modifying the physical configurationof the drop-dispensing portion of the package), the concentration of thesolution, and the dosage regimen (e.g., the number drops and frequencyof administration) to provide the desired dosage.

In certain embodiments, the packaged pharmaceutical comprises an aqueoussolution (e.g., eye drops) packaged in a sealed single-use container,e.g., each container comprising at least 1.5 nanomoles of a compound ofany of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound, such as asleast 2, 3, or 6 nanomoles of a compound of any of formulae I-IX, acompound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxincompound, or an oxylipin compound, in an aqueous formulation suitablefor topical administration to an eye. In certain such embodiments, eachcontainer comprises from 1.5 nanomoles to 550 nanomoles, such as from1.5 to 400 nanomoles, or 1.5 to 100 nanomoles of a compound of any offormulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound, in anaqueous formulation suitable for topical administration to an eye. Incertain embodiments, the packaged pharmaceutical comprises an aqueoussolution (e.g., eye drops) packaged in a sealed single-use container,e.g., each container comprising at least 0.5 micrograms of compound1001, such as at least 0.7, 1, or 2 micrograms of compound 1001 in anaqueous formulation suitable for topical administration to an eye. Incertain such embodiments, each container comprises from 0.5 microgramsto 150 micrograms of compound 1001, such as from 0.5 to 100 micrograms,or 0.5 to 25 micrograms of compound 1001 in an aqueous formulationsuitable for topical administration to an eye. In certain embodiments,the packaged pharmaceutical comprises an aqueous solution (e.g., eyedrops) packaged in a sealed single-use container, e.g., each containercomprising a solution with a concentration over 90 micromolar of acompound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound ofany one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound,such as a concentration over 100, 150, 200, or 250 micromolar of acompound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound ofany one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound,as an aqueous formulation suitable for topical administration to an eye.In certain such embodiments, each container comprises a solution with aconcentration from 90 micromolar to 7000 micromolar, such as from 90micromolar to 2000 micromolar, or 90 micromolar to 1000 micromolar of acompound of any of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound ofany one of formulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound,as an aqueous formulation suitable for topical administration to an eye.For example, in certain embodiments, the packaged pharmaceuticalcomprises an aqueous solution (e.g., eye drops) packaged in a sealedsingle-use container, e.g., each container comprising a solution with aconcentration over 30 μg/mL of compound 1001, such as a concentrationover 40, 50, 60, or 75 μg/mL of compound 1001, as an aqueous formulationsuitable for topical administration to an eye. In certain suchembodiments, each container comprises a solution with a concentrationfrom 30 μg/mL to 2000 μg/mL, such as from 30 μg/mL to 1000 μg/mL, or 30μg/mL to 350 μg/mL of compound 1001, as an aqueous formulation suitablefor topical administration to an eye.

In further embodiments, the packaged pharmaceutical comprises an aqueouspreservative-free solution comprising a compound of any one of formulaeI-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, alipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound (e.g., eye drops) packaged ina container suitable for multidose administration to an eye in need oftreatment for an ophthalmic condition. In certain such embodiments, thecontainer suitable for multidose administration of a preservative-freesolution is designed such that sterility of the solution is maintainedbetween successive uses. Suitable dispensing devices include thosedisclosed in United States Patent Application 2009/294347.

Immune Function

The present invention provides a method of inhibiting immune functionand/or suppressing an immune response in a patient, comprisingadministering to said patient a compound of the invention.

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing anautoimmune disease or an autoimmune disorder in a patient, comprisingadministering to said patient a compound of the invention.

In certain embodiments, the autoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder isof the type where the patient's own immune system damages one or more ofthe patient's tissues. In certain embodiments, the autoimmune disease orautoimmune disorder may be triggered by something within the patient orsomething within the patient's environment.

In certain embodiments, the autoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder ofthe present invention may be one which follows an initiating cause. Forexample, the autoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder may be one whichis caused by an infection and/or some other initiating cause. Potentialinitiating causes may include old age, infection (such as parasiticinfection), treatment with steroids, repeated vaccination with alum,pregnancy and/or cancers.

In certain embodiments, the autoimmune disease or autoimmune disordermay be organ-specific or non-organ-specific. Examples of such autoimmunediseases or autoimmune disorders include multiple sclerosis, arthritis(e.g., rheumatoid arthritis or juvenile arthritis), Crohn's disease,colitis ulcerosa and aplastic anemia systemic lupus erythematosus (SLEor lupus), dermatomyositis, pernicious anemia, Addison's disease,ankylosing spondylitis, antiphospholipid syndrome, Churg-StraussSyndrome, discoid lupus, fibromyalgia, Grave's Disease, myastheniagravis, psoriasis, Reiter's Syndrome, rheumatic fever, sarcoidosis,scleroderma, Sjogren's Syndrome, stiff-man syndrome, thyroiditis,uveitis, vitiligo, Wegener's granulomatosis, graft rejection, andvascular disorders.

In certain embodiments wherein the autoimmune disease or autoimmunedisorder is graft rejection, the graft rejection may be chronic graftrejection. In certain embodiments of the present invention wherein acompound of the invention is administered for the treatment of graftrejection, the administration of a compound of the invention modulatesimmune responses to grafts (e.g., allografts or xenografts) whereuntreated rejection would otherwise lead to graft loss. Thus, a compoundof the invention may be used as a replacement for or in addition to theconventional immunosuppressant administered prior to, during and/orafter transplantation. In certain embodiments, the graft rejection is inresponse to transplanting natural or artificial cells, islet cells,tissues (e.g., natural or artificial skin tissue), corneas, bone marrow,organs (e.g. kidney, liver, pancreas, lung, or heart), lenses, orpacemakers.

The present invention further provides a method of treating orpreventing a disease, sequela or pathological condition mediated by anactivation of the immune system in a patient, comprising administeringto said patient a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments,diseases, sequelae and pathological conditions mediated by an activationof the immune system include, but are not limited to, capillary leakage,pulmonary failure, sepsis, endotoxic shock, or sequelae of tissuedamage.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with other agents suitable for modulating immunefunction, suppressing immune response, treating an autoimmune disease orautoimmune disorder, or treating a disease, sequela or pathologicalcondition mediated by an activation of the imune system. For example,the following immunosuppressive agents may be conjointly administeredwith a compound of the invention: cyclosporin, cyclosporin A,tacrolimus, rapamycin, everolimus, FK-506, cyclophosphamide,azathioprene, methotrexate, brequinar, leflunomide, mizoribine,mycophenolic acid, mycophenolate mofetil, 15-deoxyspergualine,triamcinolone acetonide, decadron, daclizumab, basiliximab, glatirameracetate, infliximab, muromonab, octreotide, muramylic acid dipeptidederivatives, levamisole, niridazole, oxysuran, flagyl, and sirolimus

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable formodulating immune function, suppressing immune response, treating orpreventing an autoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder, or treating orpreventing a disease, sequela or pathological condition mediated by anactivation of the imune system, such as the agents identified above.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for modulatingimmune function, suppressing immune response, treating or preventing anautoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder, or treating or preventing adisease, sequela or pathological condition mediated by an activation ofthe imune system as mentioned above; and c) instructions for theadministration of the compound of the invention and the agent suitablefor modulating immune function, suppressing immune response, treating orpreventing an autoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder, or treating orpreventing a disease, sequela or pathological condition mediated by anactivation of the imune system.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for inhibiting immune function, suppressing        an immune response, treating or preventing an autoimmune disease        or an autoimmune disorder, or treating or preventing a disease,        sequela or pathological condition mediated by an activation of        the immune system.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for modulating immunefunction, suppressing immune response, treating or preventing anautoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder, or treating or preventing adisease, sequela or pathological condition mediated by an activation ofthe imune system as mentioned above. In certain embodiments, the kitfurther comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one ormore single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for modulatingimmune function, suppressing immune response, treating or preventing anautoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder, or treating or preventing adisease, sequela or pathological condition mediated by an activation ofthe imune system as mentioned above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for modulating immune        function, suppressing immune response, treating or preventing an        autoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder, or treating or        preventing a disease, sequela or pathological condition mediated        by an activation of the imune system as mentioned above; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for inhibiting immune function, suppressing an immune        response, treating or preventing an autoimmune disease or an        autoimmune disorder, or treating or preventing a disease,        sequela or pathological condition mediated by an activation of        the immune system.

Pulmonary Conditions

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing apulmonary condition in a patient comprising administering a compound ofthe invention. In certain embodiments, the pulmonary condition may beselected from pulmonary inflammation, airway inflammation, asthma,chronic bronchitis, bronchiectasis, non-cystic fibrosis-relatedbronchiectasis, cystic fibrosis, eosinophilic lung diseases (e.g.,parasitic infection, idiopathic eosinophilic pneumonias, andChurg-Strauss vasculitis), allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis,allergic inflammation of the respiratory tract (e.g., rhinitis andsinusitis), bronchiolitis, bronchiolitis obliterans, bronchiolitisobliterans with organizing pneumonia, eosinophilic granuloma, Wegener'sgranulomatosis, sarcoidosis, hypersensitivity pneumonitis, idiopathicpulmonary fibrosis, pulmonary manifestations of connective tissuediseases, acute or chorionic lung injury, adult respiratory distresssyndrome, pneumonia, emphysema, pulmonary disorders, or chronicobstructive pulmonary disease.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a pulmonary condition, such as the conditionsdisclosed herein. Exemplary agents suitable for the treatment ofpulmonary conditions include corticosteroids (e.g., prednisone,beclomethasone dipropionate, fluticasone propionate, and other suitablecorticosteroids), beta-agonists (e.g., albuterol, metaproterenol,pirbuterol, formoterol, terbutaline, isoetharine, levalbuterol,salmeterol xinafoate, and other suitable beta-agonists), andanti-cholinergic agents (e.g., ipratropium bromide, tiotropium bromide,and other suitable anti-cholinergic agents).

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of a pulmonary condition; and c) instructions for theadministration of the compound of the invention and the agent suitablefor the treatment or prevention of a pulmonary condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as        discussed above, e.g., a pulmonary condition.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of a pulmonary condition. In certain embodiments, the kitfurther comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one ormore single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of a pulmonary condition.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the one or more single dosage forms each comprising acompound of the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a pulmonary condition. In certainembodiments, the kit further comprises one or more single dosage formsof an agent suitable for the treatment or prevention of a pulmonarycondition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of a pulmonary condition; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as discussed above,        e.g., for treating or preventing a pulmonary condition.        Gastrointestinal Conditions

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing agastrointestinal condition in a patient comprising administering acompound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the gastrointestinalcondition may be selected from gastrointestinal inflammation, ulcerativecolitis, clostridium difficile colitis, microscopic or lymphocyticcolitis, collagenous colitis, Crohn's disease, irritable bowel syndrome,infectious enteritis, antibiotic associative diarrhea, colon polyps,familial polyps, familial polyposis syndrome, Gardner's syndrome,helicobacter pylori, nonspecific diarrheal illnesses, intestinalcancers, distal proctitis, inflammatory states associated with abnormalcolonic muscular contraction (e.g., spastic colon and mucous colitis),allergic bowel disease (e.g., coeliac disease), esophogitis, orpancreatitis.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a gastrointestinal condition, such as theconditions disclosed herein. Exemplary agents suitable for the treatmentor prevention of gastrointestinal conditions include immunosuppressiveagents (e.g., corticosteroids), histamine-2 receptor antagonists (e.g.,cimetidine, famotidine, nizatidine, and ranitidine), sucralfate,prostaglandins (e.g., misopostol), and proton pump inhibitors (e.g.,omeprazole, lansoprazole, esomeprazole, pantoprazole, and rabeprazole).

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of a gastrointestinal condition; and c) instructions forthe administration of the compound of the invention and the agentsuitable for the treatment or prevention of a gastrointestinalcondition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as        discussed above, e.g., a gastrointestinal condition.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of a gastrointestinal condition. In certain embodiments, thekit further comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as oneor more single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a gastrointestinal condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of a gastrointestinal condition; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as discussed above,        e.g., a gastrointestinal condition.        Rheumatological Conditions

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing arheumatological condition in a patient comprising administering acompound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the rheumatologicalcondition may be selected from rheumatic diseases, rheumatoid arthritis,osteoarthritis, inflammatory conditions of joints (e.g., rheumatoidarthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, osteoarthritis, gouty arthritis),ankylosing spondylitis, lupus, psoriatic arthritis, myalgias, or chroniclow back pain.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a rheumatological condition, such as theconditions disclosed herein. Exemplary agents suitable for the treatmentor prevention of rheumatological conditions include non-steroidalanti-inflammatory drugs such as salicylates (e.g., aspirin, amoxiprin,benorilate, choline magnesium salicylate, diflunisal, faislamine, methylsalicylate, magnesium salicylate, salicyl salicylate), arylalkanoicacids (e.g., diclofenac, aceclofenac, acemetacin, bromfenac, etodolac,indometacin, nabumetone, sulindac, and tolmetin), 2-arylpropionic acids(e.g., ibuprofen, carprofen, fenbufen, fenoprofen, flurbiprofen,ketoprofen, ketorolac, loxoprofen, naproxen, oxaprozin, tiaprofenicacid, and suprofen), N-arylanthranilic acids (e.g., mefenamic acid andmeclofenamic acid), pyrazolidine derivatives (e.g., phenylbutazone,azapropazone, metamizole, oxyphenbutazone, and sulfinpyrazone), oxicams(e.g., piroxicam, lornoxicam, meloxicam, and tenoxicam), COX-2inhibitors (e.g., celecoxib, etoricoxib, lumiracoxib, parecoxib,rofecoxib, and valdecoxib) and sulphonanilides (e.g., nimesulide),corticosteroids (e.g., prednisone, cortisone, solumedrol, andhydrocortisone), disease-modifying anti-rheumatic drugs (e.g.,leflunomide, oral gold, sulfasalazine, mycophenolate, cyclophosphamide,azathioprine, chlorambucil, rheumatrex, minocycline, gold shots,cuprimine, and quineprox), pain medication (e.g., acetaminophen,codeine, propoxyphene, fentanyl, hydromorphone, morphine, oxycodone,pentazocine, tramadol, and hydrocodone) and biologic response modifiers(e.g., etanercept, adalimumab, anakinra, abatacept, efalizumab,infliximab,l rituximab, and natalizumab)

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of a rheumatological condition; and c) instructions forthe administration of the compound of the invention and the agentsuitable for the treatment or prevention of a rheumatological condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as        discussed above, e.g., a rheumatological condition.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of a rheumatological condition. In certain embodiments, thekit further comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as oneor more single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a rheumatological condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of a rheumatological condition; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as discussed above,        e.g., a rheumatological condition.        Dermatological Conditions

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing adermatological condition in a patient comprising administering acompound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the dermatologicalcondition may be selected from scleroderma, psoriasis, urticaria,vasculitis, seborrheic dermatitis, pustular dermatosis, eczema,dermatitis, ulcers and erosions resulting from trauma, burns, bullousdisorders, or ischemia of the skin or mucous membranes, ichthyoses,epidermolysis bullosae, hypertrophic scars and keloids, cutaneouschanges of intrinsic aging and photoaging, frictional blistering causedby mechanical shearing of the skin, cutaneous atrophy resulting from thetopical use of corticosteroids, inflammation to mucous membranes (e.g.,cheilitis, chapped lips, nasal irritation, or vulvovaginitis), dandruff,sunburn, poison ivy, atopic dermatitis, acne, or rosacea.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a dermatological condition, such as theconditions disclosed herein. Exemplary agents suitable for the treatmentor prevention of dermatological conditions include immunosuppressiveagents, such as cyclosporine or calcineurin inhibitors (e.g., tacrolimusor pimecrolimus), corticosteroids (e.g., prednisone and betamethasonedipropionate), antihistamines (e.g., diphenhydramine, hydroxyzine, andcyproheptadine), salicyclic acid, anthroline, calcipotriene, andtazarotene.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of a dermatological condition; and c) instructions for theadministration of the compound of the invention and the agent suitablefor the treatment or prevention of a dermatological condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as        discussed above, e.g., a dermatological condition.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of a dermatological condition. In certain embodiments, thekit further comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as oneor more single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a dermatological condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of a dermatological condition; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as discussed above,        e.g., a dermatological condition.        Neurological Conditions

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing aneurological condition in a patient comprising administering a compoundof the invention. In certain embodiments, the neurological condition maybe selected from neurodegeneration or dementia associated with HIVinfection, depression, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease,addiction, alcohol-related disorders, decision analysis, degenerativeneurological disorders, dementia, neurological disorders, neuromusculardisorders, psychiatric disorders, brain injury, trauma, neuronalinflammation, or multiple sclerosis.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of a neurological condition, such as theconditions disclosed herein. Exemplary agents suitable for the treatmentof neurological conditions include thyroid hormone replacement,cholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., donepezil and tacrine), antipsychoticdrugs (e.g., clozapine, olanzapine, quetiapine, risperidone,ziprasidone, aripiprazole, trifluoperazine, flupenthixol, loxapine,perphenazine, chlorpromazine, haloperidol, fluphenazine decanoate, andthioridazine), anxiolytics, such as benzodiazepines (e.g., lorazepam,clonazepam, alprazolam, and diazepam) and non-benzodiazepines (e.g.,buspirone), drugs for the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, such asacetylcholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., donepezil, rivastigmine, andgalantamine) or NMDA receptor antagonists (e.g., memantine),antidepressants, such as selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (e.g.,fluoxetine, paroxetine, escitalopram, citalopram, and sertraline),serotonin and norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors (e.g., venlafaxine andduloxetine), noradrenergic and specific serotonergic antidepressants(e.g., mirtazapine), norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors (e.g.,reboxetine), norepinephrine and dopamine reuptake inhibitors (e.g.,bupropion), tricyclic antidepressants (e.g., amitriptyline anddesipramine), and monoamine oxidase inhibitors (e.g., phenelzine,moclobemide, and selegiline), drugs for the treatment of multiplesclerosis, such as interferons (e.g., interferon beta-1a and interferonbeta-1b), glatiramer acetate, mitoxantrone, natalizumab, andcorticosteroids (e.g., methylprednisolone or any of the corticosteroidsreferenced above), and drugs for the treatment of Parkinson's disease,such as levodopa, carbidopa, benserazide, tolcapone, entacapone;dopamine agonists, such as bromocriptine, pergolide, pramipexole,ropinirole, cabergoline, apomorphine, and lisuride; MAO-B inhibitors,such as selegiline and rasagiline, or combinations thereof.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of a neurological condition; and c) instructions for theadministration of the compound of the invention and the agent suitablefor the treatment or prevention of a neurological condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for treating a condition as discussed above,        e.g., a neurological condition.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of a neurological condition. In certain embodiments, the kitfurther comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one ormore single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of a neurological condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of a neurological condition; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as discussed above,        e.g., a neurological condition.        Cancer

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing cancerin a patient comprising administering a compound of the invention. Incertain embodiments, the cancer may be selected from breast cancer,colon cancer, leukemia, lymphoma, lung cancer, or prostate cancer.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of cancer, such as the chemotherapeutic agentsor the combination therapies as disclosed above.

In certain embodiments, a compound of the invention may be conjointlyadministered with non-chemical methods of cancer treatment orprevention. In certain embodiments, a compound of the invention may beconjointly administered with radiation therapy. In certain embodiments,a compound of the invention may be conjointly administered with surgery,with thermoablation, with focused ultrasound therapy, or withcryotherapy.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for treating or preventing cancer.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with a chemotherapeutic agent, as describedabove. In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises a secondpharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one or more single dosage forms)comprising a chemotherapeutic agent, as described above.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising a chemotherapeutic agent; and b)        instructions for the administration of the first pharmaceutical        formulation with a compound of the invention, e.g., for treating        or preventing cancer.        Infectious Conditions

The present invention provides a method of treating or preventing aninfectious condition in a patient comprising administering a compound ofthe invention. In certain embodiments, the infectious condition may beselected from a bacterial infection, parasitic diseases, a gram negativebacterial infection, salmonella typhimurium infection, an oralinfection, a fungal infection, or a viral infection.

The present invention further provides a method of treating orpreventing inflammation associated with infection in a patientcomprising administering a compound of the invention. In certain suchembodiments, compounds of the invention may stimulate and increaseproduction of anti-microbial peptides expressed by human epithelialcells (e.g., bactericidal permeability increasing protein).

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable for thetreatment or prevention of an infectious condition, such as theconditions disclosed herein. Exemplary agents suitable for the treatmentor prevention of infectious conditions include aminoglycosides (e.g.,amikacin, gentamicin, kanamycin, neomycin, netilmicin, streptomycin,tobramycin, and paromomycin), ansamycins (e.g., geldanamycin andherbimycin), carbacephem (e.g., loracarbef), carbapenems (e.g.,ertapenem, doripenem, imipenem, and meropenem), cephalosporins (e.g.,cefadroxil, cefazolin, cefalotin, cephalexin, cefaclor, cefamandole,cefoxitin, cefprozil, cefuroxime, cefixime, cefdinir, cefditoren,cefoperazone, cefotaxime, cefpodoxime, ceftazidime, ceftibuten,ceftizoxime, ceftriaxone, cefdinir, and cefepime), glycopeptides (e.g.,vancomycin), macrolides (e.g., azithromycin, clarithromycin,dirithromycin, erythromycin, roxithromycin, troleandomycin,telithromycin, and spectinomycin), monobactams (e.g., aztreonam),penicillins (e.g., amoxicillin, ampicillin, azlocillin, carbenicillin,cloxacillin, dicloxacillin, flucloxacillin, mezlocillin, nafcillin,penicillin, piperacillin, and ticarcillin), polypeptides (e.g.,bacitracin, colistin, and polymyxin B), quinolones (e.g., ciprofloxacin,enoxacin, gatifloxacin, levofloxacin, lomefloxacin, moxifloxacin,norfloxacin, ofloxacin, and trovafloxacin), sulfonamides (e.g.,mafenide, prontosil, sulfacetamide, sulfamethizole, sulfanilimide,sulfasalazine, sulfisoxazole, and trimethoprim), tetracyclines (e.g.,demeclocycline, doxycycline, minocycline, oxytetracycline, andtetracycline), arsphenamine, chloramphenicol, clindamycin, lincoamycin,ethambutol, fosfomycin, fusidic acid, furazolidone, isoniazid,linezolid, metronidazole, mupirocin, nitrofurantoin, platensimycin,pyrazinamide, quinuprisin, dalfopristin, rifampin, and timidazole.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of an infectious condition; and c) instructions for theadministration of the compound of the invention and the agent suitablefor the treatment or prevention of an infectious condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as        discussed above, e.g., an infectious condition.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for the treatment orprevention of an infectious condition. In certain embodiments, the kitfurther comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one ormore single dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of an infectious condition.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for the treatment or        prevention of an infectious condition; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for treating or preventing a condition as discussed above,        e.g., an infectious condition.        Apoptotic Conditions

The present invention provides a method of inhibiting apoptosis in apatient comprising administering a compound of the invention. Thepresent invention further provides a method of treating or preventing acondition arising from apoptosis in a patient comprising administering acompound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the condition arisingfrom apoptosis may be selected from coronary infarct damage, tissuenecrosis in chronic inflammation, smooth muscle proliferation disorders(e.g., restenosis following angioplasty), inflammatory states associatedwith arterial smooth muscle constriction (e.g., coronary spasm,ischemia-induced myocardial injury, cerebral spasm, or cerebral ischemiaand related disorders, such as stroke), conditions associated withthrombosis (e.g., coronary thrombosis, phlebitis, or phlebothrombosis),and neurodegenerative diseases.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for the treatmentor prevention of a condition arising from apoptosis; and c) instructionsfor the administration of the compound of the invention and the agentsuitable for inhibiting apoptosis or for the treatment or prevention ofa condition arising from apoptosis.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for inhibiting apoptosis or treating or        preventing a condition arising from apoptosis.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for inhibitingapoptosis or for the treatment or prevention of a condition arising fromapoptosis. In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises a secondpharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one or more single dosage forms)comprising an agent suitable for inhibiting apoptosis or for thetreatment or prevention of a condition arising from apoptosis.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for inhibiting        apoptosis or for the treatment or prevention of a condition        arising from apoptosis; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for inhibiting apoptosis or for treating or preventing a        condition arising from apoptosis.        Angiogenesis

The present invention provides a method of inhibiting angiogenesis in apatient comprising administering a compound of the invention. In certainembodiments, compounds of the present invention limit angiogenesisnecessary for solid tumor metastasis. Since angiogenesis andneovascularization are essential steps in solid tumor growth, inhibitionof angiogenesis is very useful to prevent the further growth, retard, oreven regress solid tumors. Exemplary neoplasias which may be treatedwith compounds of the present invention include, but are not limited to,gastrointestinal tumors and gliomas.

In certain embodiments, additional disorders or diseases that may betreated or prevented by inhibition of angiogenesis (e.g., byadministering a compound of the present invention) include, but are notlimited to, retinopathy associated with diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis,osteoarthritis, macular degeneration, glaucoma, Keloid formation,ulcerative colitis, Krohn's disease, and psoriasis.

In certain embodiments, different compounds of the invention may beconjointly administered with one or more other compounds of theinvention. Moreover, such combinations may be conjointly administeredwith other therapeutic agents, such as other agents suitable forinhibiting angiogenesis or for the treatment or prevention of acondition arising from angiogenesis, such as angiogenesis inhibitorsincluding, but not limited to, siRNA's, aptamers, angiostatin,endostatin, and bevacizumab.

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a kit comprising:a) one or more single dosage forms of a compound of the invention; b)one or more single dosage forms of an agent suitable for inhibitingangiogenesis or for the treatment or prevention of a condition arisingfrom angiogenesis; and c) instructions for the administration of thecompound of the invention and the agent suitable for inhibitingangiogenesis or for the treatment or prevention of a condition arisingfrom angiogenesis.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation, e.g., for inhibiting angiogenesis or treating or        preventing a condition arising from angiogenesis.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compoundof the invention conjointly with an agent suitable for inhibitingangiogenesis or for the treatment or prevention of a condition arisingfrom angiogenesis. In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises asecond pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., as one or more single dosageforms) comprising an agent suitable for inhibiting angiogenesis or forthe treatment or prevention of a condition arising from angiogenesis.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising an agent suitable for inhibiting        angiogenesis or for the treatment or prevention of a condition        arising from angiogenesis; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation with a compound of the invention,        e.g., for inhibiting angiogenesis or for treating or preventing        a condition arising from angiogenesis.

When administered alone or as part of a therapeutic regimen, in certainembodiments, the invention contemplates administration of compounds ofthe present invention to treat or prevent a particular primary disease,injury, disorder, or condition. In certain embodiments, the inventioncontemplates administration of compounds of the present invention totreat or prevent symptoms secondary to the primary disease, injury,disorder, or conditions.

Organ Preservation

The present invention provides methods for reducing, preventing orreversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survivalcomprising administering a compound of the invention to an organ donorpatient prior to removal of the organ. The present invention providesmethods for reducing or preventing stem cell damage and/or death orenhancing stem cell survival and/or preservation comprisingadministering a compound of the invention to stem cell donor patientprior to removal of the stem cells. In certain embodiments, the compoundof the invention is administered to the organ and/or stem cell donorpatient less than 24 hours prior to removal of the organ, such as lessthan 12, eight, six, four or two hours prior to removal of the organand/or stem cells. In certain embodiments, the compound of the inventionis administered to the organ and/or stem cell donor patient immediatelyprior to removal of the organ and/or stem cells (e.g., less than onehour prior to removal of the organ and/or stem cells, such as less than30, 15, or 10 minutes prior to removal of the organ and/or stem cells).In certain embodiments, the organ and/or stem cell donor patient is ahuman.

In certain embodiments, the organ and/or stem cell donor patient ischaracterized by brain death. In certain embodiments, “brain death” isdefined as the total cessation of brain function, including brain stemfunction, e.g., wherein there is no oxygen or blood flow to the brain,or wherein the brain no longer functions in any manner and will neverfunction again.

In certain embodiments, the organ and/or stem cell donor patient is notdiagnosed as having a chronic, transmissible, or infectious physicalailment, e.g., for which pharmacological intervention is or would havebeen suitable. In certain embodiments, the organ and/or stem cell donorpatient is not currently and/or has not been diagnosed with diabetes,cancer, high blood pressure, kidney disease, or cardiovascular disease,e.g., atherosclerosis or heart disease.

In certain embodiments, the method for reducing, preventing or reversingorgan damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survival comprisesadministering a compound of the invention to an organ donor patientprior to removal of the organ further comprises the step of removing theorgan from the organ donor patient. In certain such embodiments, theorgan is selected from one or more of a kidney, a liver or a lobe of aliver, a lung or part of a lung, a portion of pancreas, a portion ofintestine, a heart, a cornea or tissue (e.g., skin, blood, bone marrow,blood stem cells, or umbilical cord blood).

In certain embodiments, the method for reducing or preventing stem celldamage and/or death or enhancing stem cell survival and/or preservationcomprises administering a compound of the invention to a stem cell donorpatient prior to removal of the stem cells further comprises the step ofremoving the stem cells from the stem cell donor patient.

In certain embodiments, the organ and/or stem cell donor patient is anysuitable organ and/or stem cell donor patient. In certain embodiments,the organ and/or stem cell donor patient is a non-human animal. Forexample, the organ and/or stem cell donor patient may be a pig orprimate, such as a genetically altered animal. In certain suchembodiments, the organ and/or stem cell donor patient is an animal thathas been genetically modified such that proteins on the surface of theanimal's organs and/or cells are recognised as compatible by a humanimmune system. For example, the organ and/or stem cell donor patient maybe an animal that has been genetically modified such that proteins onthe surface of the animal's organs and/or cells are recognised as humanby the human immune system, so the organs and/or cells are not attackedwhen transplanted. In certain embodiments, the organ donor patient is apig.

The present invention provides methods for reducing, preventing orreversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survivalcomprising administering a compound of the invention to an organrecipient prior to organ transplantation.

In certain embodiments, the method for reducing, preventing or reversingorgan damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survival comprisingadministering a compound of the invention to an organ recipient prior toorgan transplantation further comprises the step of removing one or moreorgans from the organ recipient. In certain such embodiments, thecompound of the invention is administered to the organ recipient at anypoint during the organ removal process. In certain such embodiments, thestep of removing the one or more organs from the organ recipient occursprior to administering a compound of the invention to the organrecipient. In certain embodiments, the step of removing the one or moreorgans from the organ recipient occurs simultaneously to administering acompound of the invention to the organ recipient. In certainembodiments, the step of removing the one or more organs from the organrecipient occurs subsequent to administering a compound of the inventionto the organ recipient.In certain embodiments, the method for reducing, preventing or reversingorgan damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survival comprisingadministering a compound of the invention to an organ recipient prior toorgan transplantation further comprises the step of transplanting one ormore organs into the organ recipient.

The present invention further provides methods for reducing orpreventing stem cell damage and/or death or enhancing stem cellpreservation and/or survival comprising administering a compound of theinvention to a stem cell recipient prior to stem cell transplantation.

In certain embodiments, the method for reducing or preventing stem celldamage and/or death or enhancing stem cell preservation and/or survivalcomprising administering a compound of the invention to a stem cellrecipient prior to stem cell transplantation further comprises the stepof transplanting stem cells into the stem cell recipient.

The present invention further provides methods for reducing, preventingor reversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/orsurvival comprising contacting the organ with a compound of theinvention.

In certain embodiments, the organ is contacted ex vivo with a compoundof the invention. In certain embodiments, the organ is contacted with acompound of the invention in a manner other than directly through theorgan's blood supply (e.g., the organ is contacted with a compound ofthe invention outside of its circulatory system). In certainembodiments, the organ is contacted with a compound of the inventionwhile the organ is still in a subject's body, during the removal of theorgan from a subject's body, after the organ is removed from a subject'sbody, while the organ is being transplanted into a recipient,immediately after the organ is transplanted into a recipient, or anycombination thereof.

The present invention further provides methods for reducing orpreventing stem cell damage and/or death or enhancing stem cellpreservation and/or survival comprising contacting the stem cells with acompound of the invention.

In certain embodiments, the stem cells are contacted with a compound ofthe invention ex vivo (e.g., during a period of ex vivo culture and/ormanipulation, for example ex vivo culture and/or manipulation for cellexpansion and/or differentiation, during the process of cryopreservationof the stem cells, during the process of thawing cryopreserved stemcells, or any combination thereof). In certain such embodiments, thecompound of the invention is present as a component of a suitableculture medium (e.g., any culture medium suitable for ex vivo cultureand/or manipulation, cryopreservation of stem cells, or the thawing ofcryopreserved stem cells).

In certain embodiments, the stem cells are contacted with a compound ofthe invention while the stem cells are still in a subject's body, duringthe removal of the stem cells from a subject's body, after the stemcells are removed from a subject's body, during the process of ex vivoculture and/or manipulation (e.g., for expansion and/or differentiation)during the process of cryopreservation of the stem cells, during theprocess of thawing cryopreserved stem cells, while the stem cells arebeing transplanted into a recipient, immediately after the stem cellsare transplanted into a recipient, or any combination thereof.

The present invention further provides methods for reducing, preventingor reversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/orsurvival comprising contacting the organ with a preservation solutionwherein the preservation solution comprises a compound of the invention.

In certain embodiments, the preservation solution comprises a compoundof the invention in an amount sufficient for reducing, preventing orreversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survival.In certain embodiments, the preservation solution comprises a compoundof the invention at a concentration of 1 nM to 1 M, e.g., from 1 μM to 1mM. In certain embodiments, the organ preservation solution furthercomprises potassium, sodium, magnesium, calcium, phosphate, sulphate,glucose, citrate, mannitol, histidine, tryptophan, alpha-ketoglutaricacid, lactobionate, raffinose, adenosine, allopurinol, glutathione,glutamate, insulin, dexamethasone, hydroxyethyl starch, bactrim,trehalose, gluconate, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments,the organ preservation solution comprises sodium, potassium, magnesium,or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the organ preservationsolution is free or substantially free of cells, coagulation factors,nucleic acids such as DNA, and/or plasma proteins. In certainembodiments, the organ preservation solution is sterile. In certainembodiments, the organ preservation solution comprises an aqueoussolution. In certain embodiments, the organ preservation solutioncomprises a perfluorocarbon, such as a perfluoro hydrocarbon or aperfluoroalkylamine. Exemplary perfluorocarbons are described inTransplantation, 74(12), 1804-1809, Dec. 27, 2002 and Am. Assoc. ofNurse Anesthetists Journal, 74(3): 205-211, June 2007, the compounds inwhich are incorporated herein by reference.

In certain embodiments wherein the method of the present inventioncomprises reducing, preventing or reversing organ damage or enhancingorgan preservation and/or survival comprising contacting the organ witha preservation solution wherein the preservation solution comprises acompound of the invention, the preservation solution may be any suitablepreservation solution known in the art. Examples of such preservationsolutions include, but are not limited to, University of Wisconsinsolution, Krebs-Henseleit solution, Celsior solution, St. ThomasHospital 2 solution, Ringer-lactate solution, Collins solution,Euro-Collins solution, Stanford solution, Ross-Marshall citratesolution, phosphate-buffered sucrose solution, Kyoto ET solution, orBretschneider histidine tryptophan ketoglutarate (HTK) solution.

The organ may be contacted with (or administered) the preservationsolution comprising the compound of the invention at any point duringthe transplantation process. For example, the preservation solutioncomprising a compound of the invention may be administered by flushingthe organ, continuously perfusing the organ, or intermittently perfusingthrough the blood vessels of the organ while the organ is still in asubject's body, during the removal of the organ from a subject's body,after the organ is removed from a subject's body, while the organ isbeing transplanted into a recipient, immediately after the organ istransplanted into a recipient, or any combination thereof. In certainembodiments, the organ preservation solution comprising the compound ofthe invention is administered directly into the organ's blood supplywhile the organ is being blood-perfused by a cardiovascular system,which can be within the body of the organ donor or organ recipient.

In certain embodiments, the organ may be any organ suitable fortransplatation, such as a kidney, liver or lobe of a liver, heart, lungor part of a lung, skin, intestine or portion of an intestine, cornea,pancreas or portion of a pancreas, tissue (e.g., blood, bone marrow,blood stem cells, or umbilical cord blood), or any combination thereof.

In certain embodiments of methods of the invention, the stem cell isselected from adult stem cells or embryonic stem cells. Exemplary stemcells include, but are not limited to, totipotent stem cells,pluripotent stem cells, multipotent stem cells, unipotent stem cells,hematopoietic stem cells, adipose-derived stem cells, endothelial stemcells, muscle stem cells, bone marrow stromal cells (e.g., mesenchymalstem cells), neural stem cells, skin stem cells, and follicular stemcells. Embryonic stem cells include embryonic stem cells made usingsomatic cell nuclear transfer, as well as embryonic stem cells derivedfrom the inner cell mass of embryos produced by fertilization. Suitablestem cells also include induced pluripotent stem cells, regardles ofwhether the induced pluripotent stem cells are produced usingintegrative or non-integrative vectors to express one or morereprogramming factors, and/or whether the induced pluripotent stem cellsare produced using small molecules that mimic the effects ofoverexpressing one or more reprogramming factors.

In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention reduce,prevent or reverse organ damage or enhance organ preservation byprotecting the organ against reperfusion injury.

In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention reduce,prevent or reverse organ damage, reduce or prevent stem cell damageand/or death, enhance organ preservation, or enhance stem cellpreservation and/or survival by decreasing or protecting againstapoptosis.

The present invention provides a method of promoting survival of anorgan transplant recipient, comprising

-   -   administering a compound of the invention to an organ donor        patient prior to removal of the organ;    -   administering a compound of the invention to an organ recipient        prior to organ transplantation;    -   contacting the organ ex vivo with a compound of the invention;    -   contacting the organ ex vivo with a preservation solution        wherein the preservation solution comprises a compound of the        invention;    -   or any combination thereof.

The present invention provides a method of promoting survival of a stemcell transplant recipient, comprising

-   -   administering a compound of the invention to a stem cell donor        patient prior to removal of the stem cells;    -   administering a compound of the invention to a stem cell        recipient prior to stem cell transplantation;    -   contacting the stem cells ex vivo (e.g., in a suitable culture        medium) with a compound of the invention;    -   or any combination thereof.

The present invention provides a method of facilitating an organtransplant procedure and/or enhancing the success of an organ transplantprocedure, comprising

-   -   administering a compound of the invention to an organ donor        patient prior to removal of the organ;    -   administering a compound of the invention to an organ recipient        prior to organ transplantation;    -   contacting the organ ex vivo with a compound of the invention;    -   contacting the organ ex vivo with a preservation solution        wherein the preservation solution comprises a compound of the        invention;    -   or any combination thereof.

The present invention provides a method of facilitating a stem celltransplant procedure and/or enhancing the success of a stem celltransplant procedure, comprising

-   -   administering a compound of the invention to a stem cell donor        patient prior to removal of the stem cells;    -   administering a compound of the invention to a stem cell        recipient prior to stem cell transplantation;    -   contacting the stem cells ex vivo (e.g., in vitro in a suitable        culture medium, such as during the process of cyropreservation        and/or thawing of cyropreserved stem cells or during ex vivo        culture and/or manipulation) with a compound of the invention;    -   or any combination thereof.

The success of an organ and/or a stem cell transplant procedure may beevaluated, for example, by the reduction of side effects and/or symptomsassociated with the transplantation procedure, by a reduction inhospitalization time following the organ and/or stem cell transplantprocedure, by a reduction in the time between organ and/or stem celltransplantation and resumption of normal bodily functions and processes(e.g., cessation of the need for dialysis, artificial respiration, theuse of a cardiopulmonary bypass machine or other prosthetic devices,such as artificial hearts, etc.) or by an increased life expectancyfollowing organ and/or stem cell transplantation. In certainembodiments, the success of an organ transplant procedure may beevaluated, for example, as enhanced organ viability and/or functionallongevity following transplantation as compared to an untreated organ(e.g., as may be measured by a delayed need for subsequenttransplantation and/or other therapeutic intervention(s)). The presenceof any of the foregoing may be viewed as an enhancement in the successof an organ and/or stem cell transplant procedure.

The present invention provides a method of prolonging organ viability exvivo, comprising

-   -   administering a compound of the invention to an organ donor        patient prior to removal of the organ;    -   contacting the organ ex vivo with a compound of the invention;    -   contacting the organ ex vivo with a preservation solution        wherein the preservation solution comprises a compound of the        invention;    -   or any combination thereof.

The present invention provides a method of prolonging stem cellviability ex vivo, comprising

-   -   administering a compound of the invention to a stem cell donor        patient prior to removal of the stem cells;    -   contacting the stem cells ex vivo (e.g., in vitro in a suitable        culture medium, such as during the process of cyropreservation        and/or thawing of cryopreserved stem cells or during ex vivo        culture and/or manipulation, such as for stem cell expansion        and/or differentiation) with a compound of the invention;    -   or any combination thereof.

The present invention provides a method of enhancing the success of stemcell cryopreservation and/or thawing cryopreserved stem cells,comprising one or more steps of

-   -   administering a compound of the invention to a stem cell donor        patient prior to removal of the stem cells; and    -   contacting the stem cells ex vivo (e.g., in vitro in a suitable        culture medium, such as during the process of cryopreservation        of the stem cells and/or thawing of cryopreserved stem cells)        with a compound of the invention.

A patient's body, as a whole, can typically only tolerate much lowerlevels of chemo-, bio- and radiation therapy than many particularorgans. As such, prolonged and reliable ex vivo organ viability wouldprovide benefits outside the context of organ transplantation, includingproviding opportunities for ex vivo therapy. Accordingly, the subjectmethods may be used to permit an organ to be removed from the body andtreated in isolation, reducing the risk of damage to other parts of thebody.

The present invention provides an organ infused with a compound of theinvention. In certain embodiments, the organ is ex vivo. For example,the present invention provides an ex vivo organ infused with a compoundof the invention. In certain embodiments, the organ comprises aconcentration of greater than 1 nM of a compound of the invention, suchas 1 nM to 1 M, 1 mM to 1 M, or 10 mM to 1 M. In certain embodiments, alumen of an organ comprises a fluid having a concentration of greaterthan 1 nM of a compound of the invention, such as 1 nM to 1 M, 1 mM to 1M, or 10 mM to 1 M.

The present invention further provides an organ in contact with, andpreferably partially or wholly submersed in, an organ preservationsolution, wherein the organ preservation solution comprises a compoundof the invention. In certain embodiments, the organ preservationsolution further comprises potassium, sodium, magnesium, calcium,phosphate, sulphate, glucose, citrate, mannitol, histidine, tryptophan,alpha-ketoglutaric acid, lactobionate, raffinose, adenosine,allopurinol, glutathione, glutamate, insulin, dexamethasone,hydroxyethyl starch, bactrim, trehalose, gluconate, or combinationsthereof. In certain embodiments, the organ preservation solutioncomprises sodium, potassium, magnesium, or combinations thereof. Incertain embodiments, the organ preservation solution is free orsubstantially free of cells, coagulation factors, DNA, and/or plasmaproteins. In certain embodiments, the organ preservation solution issterile. In certain embodiments, the organ preservation solutioncomprises a compound of the invention at a concentration of greater than1 nM, such as greater than 10 nM, 100 nM, 1 mM, 10 mM or 100 mM. Incertain embodiments, the organ preservation solution comprises anaqueous solution. In certain embodiments, the organ preservationsolution comprises a perfluorocarbon.

The present invention provides an organ preservation solution comprisinga compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, the organpreservation solution further comprises potassium, sodium, magnesium,calcium, phosphate, sulphate, glucose, citrate, mannitol, histidine,tryptophan, alpha-ketoglutaric acid, lactobionate, raffinose, adenosine,allopurinol, glutathione, glutamate, insulin, dexamethasone,hydroxyethyl starch, bactrim, trehalose, gluconate, or combinationsthereof. In certain embodiments, the organ preservation solutioncomprises sodium, potassium, magnesium, or combinations thereof. Incertain embodiments, the organ preservation solution is free orsubstantially free of cells, coagulation factors, DNA, or plasmaproteins. In certain embodiments, the organ preservation solution issterile. In certain embodiments, the organ preservation solutioncomprises a compound of the invention at a concentration of greater than1 nM, such as greater than 10 nM, 100 nM, 1 mM, 10 mM or 100 mM. Incertain embodiments, the organ preservation solution comprises anaqueous solution. In certain embodiments, the organ preservationsolution comprises a perfluorocarbon.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation to an organ donor patient prior to removal of the        organ for reducing, preventing or reversing organ damage or        enhancing organ preservation and/or survival, and/or        instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation to a stem cell donor patient prior to removal of the        stem cells for reducing or preventing stem cell damage and/or        death or enhancing stem cell preservation and/or survival.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the pharmaceutical        formulation to an organ recipient prior to organ transplantation        for reducing, preventing or reversing organ damage or enhancing        organ preservation and/or survival, and/or instructions for the        administration of the pharmaceutical formulation to a stem cell        recipient prior to stem cell transplantation for reducing or        preventing stem cell damage and/or death or enhancing stem cell        preservation and/or survival.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) comprising a compound of the invention; and    -   b) instructions for contacting an organ with the pharmaceutical        formulation for reducing, preventing or reversing organ damage        or enhancing organ preservation and/or survival, and/or        instructions for contacting stem cells with the pharmaceutical        formulation for reducing or preventing stem cell damage and/or        death or enhancing stem cell preservation and/or survival.

In certain embodiments, the kit further comprises instructions for theadministration of the pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or moresingle dosage forms) comprising a compound of the invention conjointlywith a second therapeutic agent, such as those mentioned above. Incertain embodiments, the kit further comprises a second pharmaceuticalformulation (e.g., one or more single dosage forms) comprising a secondtherapeutic agent, such as those mentioned above. In certainembodiments, the kit further comprises a second pharmaceuticalformulation (e.g., one or more single dosage forms) comprising a secondagent suitable for reducing, preventing or reversing organ damage orenhancing organ preservation and/or survival. In certain embodiments,the kit further comprises a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., oneor more single dosage forms) comprising a second agent suitable forreducing or preventing stem cell damage and/or death or enhancing stemcell preservation and/or survival.

The present invention provides a kit comprising:

-   -   a) a first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single        dosage forms) comprising a therapeutic agent suitable for        modulating immune function, suppressing immune response,        treating an autoimmune disease or autoimmune disorder, or        treating a disease, sequela or pathological condition mediated        by an activation of the immune system, such as those mentioned        above, or an agent suitable for reducing, preventing or        reversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or        survival, or an agent suitable for reducing or preventing stem        cell damage and/or death or enhancing stem cell preservation        and/or survival; and    -   b) instructions for the administration of the first        pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage        forms) and a second pharmaceutical formulation (e.g., one or        more single dosage forms) comprising a compound of the invention        for reducing, preventing or reversing organ damage or enhancing        organ preservation and/or survival, and/or instructions for the        administration of the first pharmaceutical formulation (e.g.,        one or more single dosage forms) and a second pharmaceutical        formulation (e.g., one or more single dosage forms) comprising a        compound of the invention for reducing or preventing stem cell        damage and/or death or enhancing stem cell preservation and/or        survival.

In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for conductinga pharmaceutical business, by manufacturing a formulation of a compoundof the invention, or a kit as described herein, and marketing tohealthcare providers the benefits of using the formulation or kit forreducing, preventing or reversing organ damage or enhancing organpreservation and/or survival, or for reducing or preventing stem celldamage and/or death or enhancing stem cell preservation and/or survival.

In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for conductinga pharmaceutical business, by providing a distribution network forselling a formulation of a compound of the invention, or kit asdescribed herein, and providing instruction material to patients orphysicians for using the formulation for reducing, preventing orreversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survival,or for reducing or preventing stem cell damage and/or death or enhancingstem cell preservation and/or survival.

In certain embodiments, the invention comprises a method for conductinga pharmaceutical business, by determining an appropriate formulation anddosage of a compound of the invention for reducing, preventing orreversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survival,or for reducing or preventing stem cell damage and/or death or enhancingstem cell preservation and/or survival, conducting therapeutic profilingof identified formulations for efficacy and toxicity in animals, andproviding a distribution network for selling an identified preparationas having an acceptable therapeutic profile. In certain embodiments, themethod further includes providing a sales group for marketing thepreparation to healthcare providers.

In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for conductinga pharmaceutical business by determining an appropriate formulation anddosage of a compound of the invention for reducing, preventing orreversing organ damage or enhancing organ preservation and/or survival,or for reducing or preventing stem cell damage and/or death or enhancingstem cell preservation and/or survival, and licensing, to a third party,the rights for further development and sale of the formulation.

DEFINITIONS

“Angiogenesis” is defined as any enhancement of an existing vascular bedor the formation of new vasculature which benefits tissue perfusion.This includes the formation of new vessels by sprouting of endothelialcells from existing blood vessels or the remodeling of existing vesselsto alter size, maturity, direction or flow properties to improve bloodperfusion of tissue.

As used herein, the term “corticosteroid” refers to any of the adrenalcorticosteroid hormones isolated from the adrenal cortex or producedsynthetically, and derivatives thereof that are used for treatment ofinflammatory diseases, as described herein. Corticosteroids includethose that are naturally occurring, synthetic, or semi-synthetic inorigin, and such compounds are characterized by the presence of asteroid nucleus of four fused rings, e.g., as found in cholesterol,dihydroxycholesterol, stigmasterol, and lanosterol structures.

The term “LASIK”, as used herein, is an acronym for LAser in SItuKeratomileusis. This is a type of refractive surgery in which the corneais reshaped to change its optical power. Specifically, a disc of corneais raised as a flap, then an excimer laser is used to reshape the middlelayer of corneal tissue, producing surgical flattening. LASIK surgerymay be used for correcting myopia, hyperopia, and astigmatism.

As used herein, “immunosuppressive agent” refers to agents that suppressthe body's ability to elicit an immunological response to the presenceof an antigen/allergen. For example, the ability to fight off disease orreject a transplanted organ. Another term for these agents isanti-rejection agents. Not only are they are used to treat organrejection after transplantation, but many other diseases ofimmunological etiology such as Crohn's disease, rheumatoid arthritis,lupus, multiple sclerosis, psoriasis, and other diseases and disordersas described herein.

The term “graft”, as used herein, refers to a body part, organ, tissue,or cells. Grafts may comprise all or part of one or more organs such asliver, kidney, heart or lung; body parts such as bone or skeletalmatrix; tissue such as skin, intestines, endocrine glands; or progenitorstem cells of various types.

The term “acyl” is art-recognized and refers to a group represented bythe general formula hydrocarbylC(O)—, preferably alkylC(O)—.

The term “acylamino” is art-recognized and refers to an amino groupsubstituted with an acyl group and may be represented, for example, bythe formula hydrocarbylC(O)NH—.

The term “acyloxy” is art-recognized and refers to a group representedby the general formula hydrocarbylC(O)O—, preferably alkylC(O)O—.

The term “alkoxy” refers to an alkyl group, preferably a lower alkylgroup, having an oxygen attached thereto. Representative alkoxy groupsinclude methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, tert-butoxy and the like.

The term “alkoxyalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with analkoxy group and may be represented by the general formulaalkyl-O-alkyl.

The term “alkenyl”, as used herein, refers to an aliphatic groupcontaining at least one double bond and is intended to include both“unsubstituted alkenyls” and “substituted alkenyls”, the latter of whichrefers to alkenyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen onone or more carbons of the alkenyl group. Such substituents may occur onone or more carbons that are included or not included in one or moredouble bonds. Moreover, such substituents include all those contemplatedfor alkyl groups, as discussed below, except where stability isprohibitive. For example, substitution of alkenyl groups by one or morealkyl, carbocyclyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl groups iscontemplated.

The term “alkyl” refers to the radical of saturated aliphatic groups,including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups,cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl-substituted cycloalkyl groups, andcycloalkyl-substituted alkyl groups. In preferred embodiments, astraight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms inits backbone (e.g., C₁-C₃₀ for straight chains, C₃-C₃₀ for branchedchains), and more preferably 20 or fewer. Likewise, preferredcycloalkyls have from 3-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, andmore preferably have 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.

Moreover, the term “alkyl” (or “lower alkyl”) as used throughout thespecification, examples, and claims is intended to include both“unsubstituted alkyls” and “substituted alkyls”, the latter of whichrefers to alkyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on oneor more carbons of the hydrocarbon backbone. Such substituents, if nototherwise specified, can include, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, acarbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an alkoxycarbonyl, a formyl, or an acyl),a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate),an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, a phosphate, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, anamino, an amido, an amidine, an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, asulfhydryl, an alkylthio, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, asulfonamido, a sulfonyl, a heterocyclyl, an aralkyl, or an aromatic orheteroaromatic moiety. It will be understood by those skilled in the artthat the moieties substituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves besubstituted, if appropriate. For instance, the substituents of asubstituted alkyl may include substituted and unsubstituted forms ofamino, azido, imino, amido, phosphoryl (including phosphonate andphosphinate), sulfonyl (including sulfate, sulfonamido, sulfamoyl andsulfonate), and silyl groups, as well as ethers, alkylthios, carbonyls(including ketones, aldehydes, carboxylates, and esters), —CF₃, —CN andthe like. Exemplary substituted alkyls are described below. Cycloalkylscan be further substituted with alkyls, alkenyls, alkoxys, alkylthios,aminoalkyls, carbonyl-substituted alkyls, —CF₃, —CN, and the like.

The term “C_(x-y)” when used in conjunction with a chemical moiety, suchas, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy is meant toinclude groups that contain from x to y carbons in the chain. Forexample, the term “C_(x-y)alkyl” refers to substituted or unsubstitutedsaturated hydrocarbon groups, including straight-chain alkyl andbranched-chain alkyl groups that contain from x to y carbons in thechain, including haloalkyl groups such as trifluoromethyl and2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, etc. C₀ alkyl indicates a hydrogen where the groupis in a terminal position, a bond if internal. The terms“C_(2-y)alkenyl” and “C_(2-y)alkynyl” refer to substituted orunsubstituted unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length andpossible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain atleast one double or triple bond respectively.

The term “alkylamino”, as used herein, refers to an amino groupsubstituted with at least one alkyl group.

The term “alkylthio”, as used herein, refers to a thiol groupsubstituted with an alkyl group and may be represented by the generalformula alkylS—.

The term “alkynyl”, as used herein, refers to an aliphatic groupcontaining at least one triple bond and is intended to include both“unsubstituted alkynyls” and “substituted alkynyls”, the latter of whichrefers to alkynyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen onone or more carbons of the alkynyl group. Such substituents may occur onone or more carbons that are included or not included in one or moretriple bonds. Moreover, such substituents include all those contemplatedfor alkyl groups, as discussed above, except where stability isprohibitive. For example, substitution of alkynyl groups by one or morealkyl, carbocyclyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl groups iscontemplated.

The term “amide”, as used herein, refers to a group

wherein each R¹⁰ independently represent a hydrogen or hydrocarbylgroup, or two R¹⁰ are taken together with the N atom to which they areattached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ringstructure.

The terms “amine” and “amino” are art-recognized and refer to bothunsubstituted and substituted amines and salts thereof, e.g., a moietythat can be represented by

wherein each R¹⁰ independently represents a hydrogen or a hydrocarbylgroup, or two R¹⁰ are taken together with the N atom to which they areattached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ringstructure.

The term “aminoalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl groupsubstituted with an amino group.

The term “aralkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substitutedwith an aryl group.

The term “aryl” as used herein include substituted or unsubstitutedsingle-ring aromatic groups in which each atom of the ring is carbon.Preferably the ring is a 5- to 7-membered ring, more preferably a6-membered ring. The term “aryl” also includes polycyclic ring systemshaving two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are commonto two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic,e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls,cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls. Aryl groupsinclude benzene, naphthalene, phenanthrene, phenol, aniline, and thelike.

The term “carbamate” is art-recognized and refers to a group

wherein R⁹ and R¹⁰ independently represent hydrogen or a hydrocarbylgroup, such as an alkyl group, or R⁹ and R¹⁰ taken together with theintervening atom(s) complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms inthe ring structure.

The terms “carbocycle”, “carbocyclyl”, and “carbocyclic”, as usedherein, refers to a non-aromatic saturated or unsaturated ring in whicheach atom of the ring is carbon. Preferably a carbocycle ring containsfrom 3 to 10 atoms, more preferably from 5 to 7 atoms.

The term “carbocyclylalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl groupsubstituted with a carbocycle group.

The term “carbonate” is art-recognized and refers to a group —OCO₂—R¹⁰,wherein R¹⁰ represents a hydrocarbyl group.

The term “carboxy”, as used herein, refers to a group represented by theformula —CO₂H.

The term “ester”, as used herein, refers to a group —C(O)OR¹⁰ whereinR¹⁰ represents a hydrocarbyl group.

The term “ether”, as used herein, refers to a hydrocarbyl group linkedthrough an oxygen to another hydrocarbyl group. Accordingly, an ethersubstituent of a hydrocarbyl group may be hydrocarbyl-O—. Ethers may beeither symmetrical or unsymmetrical. Examples of ethers include, but arenot limited to, heterocycle-β-heterocycle and aryl-O-heterocycle. Ethersinclude “alkoxyalkyl” groups, which may be represented by the generalformula alkyl-O-alkyl.

The terms “halo” and “halogen” as used herein means halogen and includeschloro, fluoro, bromo, and iodo.

The terms “hetaralkyl” and “heteroaralkyl”, as used herein, refers to analkyl group substituted with a hetaryl group.

The term “heteroalkyl”, as used herein, refers to a saturated orunsaturated chain of carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom, whereinno two heteroatoms are adjacent.

The terms “heteroaryl” and “hetaryl” include substituted orunsubstituted aromatic single ring structures, preferably 5- to7-membered rings, more preferably 5- to 6-membered rings, whose ringstructures include at least one heteroatom, preferably one to fourheteroatoms, more preferably one or two heteroatoms. The terms“heteroaryl” and “hetaryl” also include polycyclic ring systems havingtwo or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to twoadjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heteroaromatic,e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls,cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls. Heteroarylgroups include, for example, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole,oxazole, thiazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, andpyrimidine, and the like.

The term “heteroatom” as used herein means an atom of any element otherthan carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, andsulfur.

The terms “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycle”, and “heterocyclic” refer tosubstituted or unsubstituted non-aromatic ring structures, preferably 3-to 10-membered rings, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ringstructures include at least one heteroatom, preferably one to fourheteroatoms, more preferably one or two heteroatoms. The terms“heterocyclyl” and “heterocyclic” also include polycyclic ring systemshaving two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are commonto two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings isheterocyclic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls,cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, piperidine, piperazine,pyrrolidine, morpholine, lactones, lactams, and the like.

The term “heterocyclylalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl groupsubstituted with a heterocycle group.

The term “hydrocarbyl”, as used herein, refers to a group that is bondedthrough a carbon atom that does not have a ═O or ═S substituent, andtypically has at least one carbon-hydrogen bond and a primarily carbonbackbone, but may optionally include heteroatoms. Thus, groups likemethyl, ethoxyethyl, 2-pyridyl, and trifluoromethyl are considered to behydrocarbyl for the purposes of this application, but substituents suchas acetyl (which has a ═O substituent on the linking carbon) and ethoxy(which is linked through oxygen, not carbon) are not. Hydrocarbyl groupsinclude, but are not limited to aryl, heteroaryl, carbocycle,heterocycle, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and combinations thereof.

The term “hydroxyalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl groupsubstituted with a hydroxy group.

The term “lower” when used in conjunction with a chemical moiety, suchas, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy is meant toinclude groups where there are ten or fewer non-hydrogen atoms in thesubstituent, preferably six or fewer. A “lower alkyl”, for example,refers to an alkyl group that contains ten or fewer carbon atoms,preferably six or fewer. In certain embodiments, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl,alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy substituents defined herein are respectivelylower acyl, lower acyloxy, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, orlower alkoxy, whether they appear alone or in combination with othersubstituents, such as in the recitations hydroxyalkyl and aralkyl (inwhich case, for example, the atoms within the aryl group are not countedwhen counting the carbon atoms in the alkyl substituent).

The terms “polycyclyl”, “polycycle”, and “polycyclic” refer to two ormore rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls,heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more atoms are commonto two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are “fused rings”. Each of therings of the polycycle can be substituted or unsubstituted. In certainembodiments, each ring of the polycycle contains from 3 to 10 atoms inthe ring, preferably from 5 to 7.

The term “silyl” refers to a silicon moiety with three hydrocarbylmoieties attached thereto.

The term “substituted” refers to moieties having substituents replacinga hydrogen on one or more carbons of the backbone. It will be understoodthat “substitution” or “substituted with” includes the implicit provisothat such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of thesubstituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution resultsin a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergotransformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc.As used herein, the term “substituted” is contemplated to include allpermissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, thepermissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched andunbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and non-aromaticsubstituents of organic compounds. The permissible substituents can beone or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds.For purposes of this invention, the heteroatoms such as nitrogen mayhave hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents oforganic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of theheteroatoms. Substituents can include any substituents described herein,for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, analkoxycarbonyl, a formyl, or an acyl), a thiocarbonyl (such as athioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, aphosphate, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, an amino, an amido, an amidine,an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfhydryl, an alkylthio, asulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, a sulfonamido, a sulfonyl, aheterocyclyl, an aralkyl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety. Itwill be understood by those skilled in the art that the moietiessubstituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves be substituted, ifappropriate. Unless specifically stated as “unsubstituted,” referencesto chemical moieties herein are understood to include substitutedvariants. For example, reference to an “aryl” group or moiety implicitlyincludes both substituted and unsubstituted variants.

The term “sulfate” is art-recognized and refers to the group —OSO₃H, ora pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

The term “sulfonamide” is art-recognized and refers to the grouprepresented by the general formulae

wherein R⁹ and R¹⁰ independently represents hydrogen or hydrocarbyl,such as alkyl, or R⁹ and R¹⁰ taken together with the intervening atom(s)complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.

The term “sulfoxide” is art-recognized and refers to the group—S(O)—R¹⁰, wherein R¹⁰ represents a hydrocarbyl.

The term “sulfonate” is art-recognized and refers to the group SO₃H, ora pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

The term “sulfone” is art-recognized and refers to the group—S(O)_(n)—R¹⁰, wherein R¹⁰ represents a hydrocarbyl.

The term “thioalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl groupsubstituted with a thiol group.

The term “thioester”, as used herein, refers to a group —C(O)SR¹⁰ or—SC(O)R¹⁰ wherein R¹⁰ represents a hydrocarbyl.

The term “thioether”, as used herein, is equivalent to an ether, whereinthe oxygen is replaced with a sulfur.

The term “urea” is art-recognized and may be represented by the generalformula

wherein R⁹ and R¹⁰ independently represent hydrogen or a hydrocarbyl,such as alkyl, or either occurrence of R⁹ taken together with R¹⁰ andthe intervening atom(s) complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atomsin the ring structure.

“Protecting group” refers to a group of atoms that, when attached to areactive functional group in a molecule, mask, reduce or prevent thereactivity of the functional group. Typically, a protecting group may beselectively removed as desired during the course of a synthesis.Examples of protecting groups can be found in Greene and Wuts,Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, 3^(rd) Ed., 1999, John Wiley &Sons, NY and Harrison et al., Compendium of Synthetic Organic Methods,Vols. 1-8, 1971-1996, John Wiley & Sons, NY. Representative nitrogenprotecting groups include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl,trifluoroacetyl, benzyl, benzyloxycarbonyl (“CBZ”), tert-butoxycarbonyl(“Boc”), trimethylsilyl (“TMS”), 2-trimethylsilyl-ethanesulfonyl(“TES”), trityl and substituted trityl groups, alkyloxycarbonyl,9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (“FMOC”), nitro-veratryloxycarbonyl(“NVOC”) and the like. Representative hydroxyl protecting groupsinclude, but are not limited to, those where the hydroxyl group iseither acylated (esterified) or alkylated such as benzyl and tritylethers, as well as alkyl ethers, tetrahydropyranyl ethers, trialkylsilylethers (e.g., TMS or TIPS groups), glycol ethers, such as ethyleneglycol and propylene glycol derivatives and allyl ethers.

The term “healthcare providers” refers to individuals or organizationsthat provide healthcare services to a person, community, etc. Examplesof “healthcare providers” include doctors, hospitals, continuing careretirement communities, skilled nursing facilities, subacute carefacilities, clinics, multispecialty clinics, freestanding ambulatorycenters, home health agencies, and HMO's.

The term “treating” refers to: preventing a disease, disorder orcondition from occurring in a cell, a tissue, a system, animal or humanwhich may be predisposed to the disease, disorder and/or condition buthas not yet been diagnosed as having it; stabilizing a disease, disorderor condition, i.e., arresting its development; and relieving one or moresymptoms of the disease, disorder or condition, i.e., causing regressionof the disease, disorder and/or condition.

As used herein, a therapeutic that “prevents” a disorder or conditionrefers to a compound that, in a statistical sample, reduces theoccurrence of the disorder or condition in the treated sample relativeto an untreated control sample, or delays the onset or reduces theseverity of one or more symptoms of the disorder or condition relativeto the untreated control sample.

As used herein, a “complex disorder having an inflammatory component” isa disease where the initial pathology/dysfunction in a particular tissueor organ that is vital for the systems biology function of an individualwill secondarily lead to systemic metabolic derangement and/or tissuestress causing, or further enhancing, activation of the immune systemleading to dysfunction in several organs vital for body homeostasis.

Pharmaceutical Compositions

The compositions and methods of the present invention may be utilized totreat an individual in need thereof. In certain embodiments, theindividual is a mammal such as a human, or a non-human mammal. Whenadministered to an animal, such as a human, the composition or thecompound is preferably administered as a pharmaceutical compositioncomprising, for example, a compound of the invention and apharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Pharmaceutically acceptablecarriers are well known in the art and include, for example, aqueoussolutions such as water or physiologically buffered saline or othersolvents or vehicles such as glycols, glycerol, oils such as olive oilor injectable organic esters. In a preferred embodiment, when suchpharmaceutical compositions are for human administration, the aqueoussolution is pyrogen free, or substantially pyrogen free. The excipientscan be chosen, for example, to effect delayed release of an agent or toselectively target one or more cells, tissues or organs. Thepharmaceutical composition can be in dosage unit form such as tablet,capsule (including sprinkle capsule and gelatin capsule), granule,powder, syrup, suppository, injection or the like. The composition canalso be present in a transdermal delivery system, e.g., a skin patch.The composition can also be present in a solution suitable for topicaladministration, such as an eye drop.

A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can contain physiologicallyacceptable agents that act, for example, to stabilize or to increase theabsorption of a compound such as a compound of the invention. Suchphysiologically acceptable agents include, for example, carbohydrates,such as glucose, sucrose or dextrans, antioxidants, such as ascorbicacid or glutathione, chelating agents, low molecular weight proteins orother stabilizers or excipients. The choice of a pharmaceuticallyacceptable carrier, including a physiologically acceptable agent,depends, for example, on the route of administration of the composition.The pharmaceutical composition (preparation) also can be a liposome orother polymer matrix, which can have incorporated therein, for example,a compound of the invention. Liposomes, for example, which comprisephospholipids or other lipids, are nontoxic, physiologically acceptableand metabolizable carriers that are relatively simple to make andadminister.

The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable” is employed herein to refer tothose compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are,within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contactwith the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity,irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication,commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.

The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” as used herein means apharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as aliquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulatingmaterial. Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of beingcompatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and notinjurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve aspharmaceutically acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such aslactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch andpotato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodiumcarboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4)powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients,such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanutoil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil andsoybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, suchas glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters,such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) bufferingagents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginicacid; (16) pyrogen-free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer'ssolution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) phosphate buffer solutions; and (21)other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceuticalformulations.

A pharmaceutical composition (preparation) can be administered to asubject by any of a number of routes of administration including, forexample, orally (for example, drenches as in aqueous or non-aqueoussolutions or suspensions, tablets, capsules (including sprinkle capsulesand gelatin capsules), boluses, powders, granules, pastes forapplication to the tongue); absorption through the oral mucosa (e.g.,sublingually); anally, rectally or vaginally (for example, as a pessary,cream or foam); parenterally (including intramusclularly, intravenously,subcutaneously or intrathecally as, for example, a sterile solution orsuspension); nasally; intraperitoneally; subcutaneously; transdermally(for example as a patch applied to the skin); and topically (forexample, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin, or as an eyedrop). The compound may also be formulated for inhalation. In certainembodiments, a compound may be simply dissolved or suspended in sterilewater. Details of appropriate routes of administration and compositionssuitable for same can be found in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos.6,110,973, 5,763,493, 5,731,000, 5,541,231, 5,427,798, 5,358,970 and4,172,896, as well as in patents cited therein.

The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form andmay be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Theamount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carriermaterial to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon thehost being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount ofactive ingredient that can be combined with a carrier material toproduce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of thecompound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of onehundred percent, this amount will range from about 1 percent to aboutninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5percent to about 70 percent, most preferably from about 10 percent toabout 30 percent.

Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the stepof bringing into association an active compound, such as a compound ofthe invention, with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessoryingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly andintimately bringing into association a compound of the present inventionwith liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, andthen, if necessary, shaping the product.

Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be inthe form of capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules),cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usuallysucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solutionor a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as anoil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup,or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, orsucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containinga predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as anactive ingredient. Compositions or compounds may also be administered asa bolus, electuary or paste.

To prepare solid dosage forms for oral administration (capsules(including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules), tablets, pills,dragees, powders, granules and the like), the active ingredient is mixedwith one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as sodiumcitrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillersor extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol,and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example,carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone,sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4)disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato ortapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate;(5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorptionaccelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents,such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate; (8)absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such atalc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols,sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; and (10) coloring agents.In the case of capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatincapsules), tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may alsocomprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may alsobe employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules usingsuch excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecularweight polyethylene glycols and the like.

A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one ormore accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared usingbinder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose),lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example,sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose),surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made bymolding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compoundmoistened with an inert liquid diluent.

The tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceuticalcompositions, such as dragees, capsules (including sprinkle capsules andgelatin capsules), pills and granules, may optionally be scored orprepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and othercoatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may alsobe formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the activeingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose invarying proportions to provide the desired release profile, otherpolymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be sterilizedby, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or byincorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solidcompositions that can be dissolved in sterile water, or some othersterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions mayalso optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a compositionthat they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in acertain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayedmanner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used includepolymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be inmicro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of theabove-described excipients.

Liquid dosage forms useful for oral administration includepharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions,suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient,the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in theart, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agentsand emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethylcarbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propyleneglycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut,corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurylalcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, andmixtures thereof.

Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvantssuch as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening,flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.

Suspensions, in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspendingagents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylenesorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminummetahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixturesthereof.

Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions for rectal, vaginal, orurethral administration may be presented as a suppository, which may beprepared by mixing one or more active compounds with one or moresuitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example,cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate,and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperatureand, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and releasethe active compound.

Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions for administration tothe mouth may be presented as a mouthwash, or an oral spray, or an oralointment.

Alternatively or additionally, compositions can be formulated fordelivery via a catheter, stent, wire, or other intraluminal device.Delivery via such devices may be especially useful for delivery to thebladder, urethra, ureter, rectum, or intestine.

Formulations which are suitable for vaginal administration also includepessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulationscontaining such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.

Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration includepowders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions,patches and inhalants. The active compound may be mixed under sterileconditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and with anypreservatives, buffers, or propellants that may be required.

The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to anactive compound, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils,waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives,polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zincoxide, or mixtures thereof.

Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to an active compound,excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide,calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such aschlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, suchas butane and propane.

Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlleddelivery of a compound of the present invention to the body. Such dosageforms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the active compound in theproper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase theflux of the compound across the skin. The rate of such flux can becontrolled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersingthe compound in a polymer matrix or gel.

Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like,are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.Exemplary ophthalmic formulations are described in U.S. Publication Nos.2005/0080056, 2005/0059744, 2005/0031697 and 2005/004074 and U.S. Pat.No. 6,583,124, the contents of which are incorporated herein byreference. If desired, liquid ophthalmic formulations have propertiessimilar to that of lacrimal fluids, aqueous humor or vitreous humor orare compatable with such fluids. A preferred route of administration islocal administration (e.g., topical administration, such as eye drops,or administration via an implant).

The phrases “parenteral administration” and “administered parenterally”as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral andtopical administration, usually by injection, and includes, withoutlimitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal,intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal,transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular,subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.

Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for parenteral administrationcomprise one or more active compounds in combination with one or morepharmaceutically acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueoussolutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powderswhich may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions ordispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers,bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with theblood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.

Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers that may beemployed in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention includewater, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol,polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof,vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, suchas ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by theuse of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of therequired particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use ofsurfactants.

These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives,wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention ofthe action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of variousantibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben,chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also bedesirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride,and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption ofthe injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusionof agents that delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate andgelatin.

In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirableto slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscularinjection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension ofcrystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rateof absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution,which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form.Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drugform is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oilvehicle.

Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsuled matrices ofthe subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such aspolylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer,and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drugrelease can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymersinclude poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectableformulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes ormicroemulsions that are compatible with body tissue.

For use in the methods of this invention, active compounds can be givenper se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of active ingredient incombination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

Methods of introduction may also be provided by rechargeable orbiodegradable devices. Various slow release polymeric devices have beendeveloped and tested in vivo in recent years for the controlled deliveryof drugs, including proteinacious biopharmaceuticals. A variety ofbiocompatible polymers (including hydrogels), including bothbiodegradable and non-degradable polymers, can be used to form animplant for the sustained release of a compound at a particular targetsite.

Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceuticalcompositions may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the activeingredient that is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic responsefor a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration,without being toxic to the patient.

The selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factorsincluding the activity of the particular compound or combination ofcompounds employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route ofadministration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of theparticular compound(s) being employed, the duration of the treatment,other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with theparticular compound(s) employed, the age, sex, weight, condition,general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated,and like factors well known in the medical arts.

A physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readilydetermine and prescribe the therapeutically effective amount of thepharmaceutical composition required. For example, the physician orveterinarian could start doses of the pharmaceutical composition orcompound at levels lower than that required in order to achieve thedesired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until thedesired effect is achieved. By “therapeutically effective amount” ismeant the concentration of a compound that is sufficient to elicit thedesired therapeutic effect. It is generally understood that theeffective amount of the compound will vary according to the weight, sex,age, and medical history of the subject. Other factors which influencethe effective amount may include, but are not limited to, the severityof the patient's condition, the disorder being treated, the stability ofthe compound, and, if desired, another type of therapeutic agent beingadministered with the compound of the invention. A larger total dose canbe delivered by multiple administrations of the agent. Methods todetermine efficacy and dosage are known to those skilled in the art(Isselbacher et al. (1996) Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine 13ed., 1814-1882, herein incorporated by reference).

In general, a suitable daily dose of an active compound used in thecompositions and methods of the invention will be that amount of thecompound that is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeuticeffect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factorsdescribed above.

If desired, the effective daily dose of the active compound may beadministered as one, two, three, four, five, six or more sub-dosesadministered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day,optionally, in unit dosage forms. In certain embodiments of the presentinvention, the active compound may be administered two or three timesdaily. In preferred embodiments, the active compound will beadministered once daily.

The patient receiving this treatment is any animal in need, includingprimates, in particular humans, and other mammals such as equines,cattle, swine and sheep; and poultry and pets in general.

In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention may be used alone orconjointly administered with another type of therapeutic agent. As usedherein, the phrase “conjoint administration” refers to any form ofadministration of two or more different therapeutic compounds such thatthe second compound is administered while the previously administeredtherapeutic compound is still effective in the body (e.g., the twocompounds are simultaneously effective in the patient, which may includesynergistic effects of the two compounds). For example, the differenttherapeutic compounds can be administered either in the same formulationor in a separate formulation, either concomitantly or sequentially. Incertain embodiments, the different therapeutic compounds can beadministered within one hour, 12 hours, 24 hours, 36 hours, 48 hours, 72hours, or a week of one another. Thus, an individual who receives suchtreatment can benefit from a combined effect of different therapeuticcompounds.

This invention includes the use of pharmaceutically acceptable salts ofcompounds of the invention in the compositions and methods of thepresent invention. In certain embodiments, contemplated salts of theinvention include, but are not limited to, alkyl, dialkyl, trialkyl ortetra-alkyl ammonium salts. In certain embodiments, contemplated saltsof the invention include, but are not limited to, L-arginine,benenthamine, benzathine, betaine, calcium hydroxide, choline, deanol,diethanolamine, diethylamine, 2-(diethylamino)ethanol, ethanolamine,ethylenediamine, N-methylglucamine, hydrabamine, 1H-imidazole, lithiumhydroxide, L-lysine, magnesium hydroxide, 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)morpholine,piperazine, potassium hydroxide, 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)pyrrolidine, sodiumhydroxide, triethanolamine, tromethamine, and zinc hydroxide salts. Incertain embodiments, contemplated salts of the invention include, butare not limited to, Na, Ca, K, Mg, Zn or other metal salts.

The pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts can also exist asvarious solvates, such as with water, methanol, ethanol,dimethylformamide, and the like. Mixtures of such solvates can also beprepared. The source of such solvate can be from the solvent ofcrystallization, inherent in the solvent of preparation orcrystallization, or adventitious to such solvent.

Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium laurylsulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, releaseagents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents,preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.

Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: (1) watersoluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride,sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2)oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylatedhydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propylgallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents,such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol,tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.

In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for conductinga pharmaceutical business, by manufacturing a formulation of a compoundof the invention, or a kit as described herein, and marketing tohealthcare providers the benefits of using the formulation or kit fortreating or preventing any of the diseases or conditions as describedherein.

In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for conductinga pharmaceutical business, by providing a distribution network forselling a formulation of a compound of the invention, or kit asdescribed herein, and providing instruction material to patients orphysicians for using the formulation for treating or preventing any ofthe diseases or conditions as described herein.

In certain embodiments, the invention comprises a method for conductinga pharmaceutical business, by determining an appropriate formulation anddosage of a compound of the invention for treating or preventing any ofthe diseases or conditions as described herein, conducting therapeuticprofiling of identified formulations for efficacy and toxicity inanimals, and providing a distribution network for selling an identifiedpreparation as having an acceptable therapeutic profile. In certainembodiments, the method further includes providing a sales group formarketing the preparation to healthcare providers.

In certain embodiments, the invention relates to a method for conductinga pharmaceutical business by determining an appropriate formulation anddosage of a compound of the invention for treating or preventing any ofthe disease or conditions as described herein, and licensing, to a thirdparty, the rights for further development and sale of the formulation.

EXAMPLES Example 1 Ocular PK (Distribution) Study in Dutch-BeltedRabbits

The ocular distribution of compound 1001,

and the corresponding methyl ester compound 1002,

in the ocular tissues of Dutch-belted rabbits when administeredtopically to the surface of the eye was evaluated.

Healthy, young adult Dutch-belted rabbits (male/female; at least 1.5 kg)were acclimated for at least 7 days prior to initiation of the study.Prior to the initiation of the study, the eyes of the rabbits wereexamined to ensure that the eyes were free of any defects that mayaffect the integrity of the study. Examinations were performed by aqualified observer.

Animals were dosed via the topical ocular route using a pipettor systemwhich delivered a 30 μL dose to each eye. Each animal was dosed at T=0.The right eye received a dose concentration of 300 μg/mL of compound1001 and the left eye received a dose concentration of 300 μg/mL ofcompound 1002. At the intervals noted in Table 3, the animals weresacrificed.

TABLE 3 Test Test # of Dose Substance Substance Sacrifice Group AnimalsVolume Right Eye Left Eye Time 1 2 30 μL 1001 1002 0.25 hrs 2 2 30 μL1001 1002 0.50 hrs 3 2 30 μL 1001 1002 1 hr 4 2 30 μL 1001 1002 2 hrs 52 30 μL 1001 1002 6 hrsAnimals were euthanized with an overdose of an injectable barbiturate,and the eyes were retrieved from each animal. Using new or newly cleanedinstruments for each eye, the eyes were dissected and the followingtissues isolated for analysis: conjunctiva, aqueous humor, cornea, lens,vitreous, iris/ciliary body, retina/choroid, optic nerve, and sclera.Each tissue was snap frozen in liquid nitrogen and stored at −80° C. forfurther analysis.Analysis of Ocular Tissues:

Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is expected that bothcompounds 1001 and 1002 are metabolized to their correspondingcarboxylic acid, compound 1003

wherein M is H (compound 45) or a pharmaceutically acceptable cation,such as ammonium, tetra-alkyl ammonium, Na (compound Z), K, Mg, and Zn.Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that compound 1003or its metabolite(s) is primarily responsible for the biologicalactivity associated with compound 1001. Compound 1003 was extracted fromocular tissues (cornea, retina) by homogenization followed by proteinprecipitation with 4 parts acetonitrile containing IS. The resultingsupernatant was dried under nitrogen and reconstituted as a concentratedsolution in Mobile Phase A. Compound 1003 was extracted fromaqueous/vitreous humor by protein precipitation with 5 partsacetonitrile containing IS. The resulting supernatant was dried undernitrogen and reconstituted as a concentrated solution in Mobile Phase A.

Mobile Phase A was added to rabbit cornea (−80 mg) to achieve a finalw/v concentration of 5% solids. Corneas were homogenized until ahomogenous suspension was obtained. For blank homogenate, multiplecorneas were pooled and homogenized.

Mobile Phase A was added to rabbit retina (−75 mg) to achieve a finalw/v concentration of 7% solids. Retinas were homogenized until ahomogenous suspension was obtained. For blank homogenate, multipleretinas were pooled and homogenized.

Spiking solutions for standards were prepared by diluting compound 1003as its sodium salt (e.g., M is Na) (dissolved in ethanol) in ethanolspanning the concentration range of 0.100 to 4000 ng/mL of compound1003. Two standard curves were extracted and subsequently analyzed onebefore and one after the samples.

To 1 volume homogenate (100 μL), 1/10^(th) volume (10 μL) of ethanol wasadded to samples and blanks, and 1/10^(th) volume (10 μL) of spikingsolution was added to standards. 4 volumes of acetonitrile containing12.5 ng/mL IS (400 μL) were added, and the samples were gently mixed for˜1 minute and centrifuged for 10 min at 3200 rcf. The supernatant wasremoved (˜400 μL), dried under nitrogen at 60° C. and reconstituted in100 μL of 5 mM Ammonium Acetate.

Alternatively, standards were prepared by diluting compound 1003 as itssodium salt (e.g., M is Na) directly in blank homogenate spanning theconcentration range of 0.0100 to 400 ng/mL of compound 1003. Thiseliminated the addition of 1/10^(th) volume (10 μL) of ethanol tosamples and blanks in the subsequent extraction.

Compound 1003 in the homogenized/extracted/dried/reconstituted sampleswas analyzed by LC/MS/MS using D4-PGE2 as the internal standard.Detection was performed on an Applied Biosystems API-4000 MassSpectrometer using the following method:

LC Guard Column: Aqua C18 4×2.0 mm, 3 μm, Phenomenex # AJ0-7510

Column: Luna C18(2) 30×2.0 mm, 3 μm, Phenomenex #00A-4251-B0

Mobile Phase A: 5 mM Ammonium Acetate in water

Mobile Phase B: 5 mM Ammonium Acetate in 95:5 acetonitrile:water

Gradient:

t = 0 5% B t = 1 min 5% B t = 1.5 min 40% B  t = 2.0 min 40% B  t = 2.75min 100% B  t = 4.15 min 100% B  t = 4.25 min 5% B t = 4.75 min 5% B

Flow Rate: 0.5 mL/min

Injection Volume: 50 μL

MS Detection Scan Type: MRM

Polarity: Negative

Ion Source Electrospray

Analyte Transition: m/z 260.95 to 114.9

IS Transition: m/z 355.0 to 275.3

The linear standard curve of area ratio to compound 1003 concentrationwas generated using 1/X² weighting.

Analysis of Ocular Fluids:

Compound 1003 was extracted from aqueous/vitreous humor by proteinprecipitation with 5 parts acetonitrile containing IS. Resultingsupernatant was dried under nitrogen and reconstituted as a concentratedsolution in Mobile Phase A.

Spiking solutions for standards were prepared by diluting compound 1003as its sodium salt (e.g., M is Na) (dissolved in ethanol) in ethanolspanning the concentration range of 0.040 to 4000 ng/mL of compound1003. Two standard curves were extracted and subsequently analyzed onebefore and one after the samples.

To 1 volume aqueous or vitreous humor (120 μL), ¼^(th) volume (30 μL) ofethanol was added to samples and blanks, and ¼^(th) volume (30 μL) ofspiking solution was added to standards. 5 volumes of acetonitrilecontaining 25 ng/mL IS (600 μL) were added, and the samples were gentlymixed for ˜1 minute and centrifuged for 10 min at 3200 rcf. Thesupernatant was removed (˜450 μL), dried under nitrogen at 60° C. andreconstituted in 90 μL of 5 mM Ammonium Acetate.

Alternatively, standards were prepared by diluting compound 1003 as itssodium salt (e.g., M is Na) directly in blank aqueous or vitreous humorspanning the concentration range of 0.0100 to 1000 ng/mL of compound1003. This eliminated the addition of ¼^(th) volume (30 μL) of ethanolto samples and blanks in the subsequent extraction.

Compound 1003 in the extracted/dried/reconstituted samples was analyzedby LC/MS/MS using D4-PGE2 as the internal standard. Detection wasperformed on an Applied Biosystems API-4000 Mass Spectrometer using thefollowing method:

LC Guard Column: Aqua C18 4×2.0 mm, 3 μm, Phenomenex # AJ0-7510

Column: Luna C18(2) 30×2.0 mm, 3 μm, Phenomenex #00A-4251-B0

Mobile Phase A: 5 mM Ammonium Acetate in water

Mobile Phase B: 5 mM Ammonium Acetate in 95:5 acetonitrile:water

Gradient:

t = 0 5% B t = 1 min 5% B t = 1.5 min 40% B  t = 2.0 min 40% B  t = 2.75min 100% B  t = 4.15 min 100% B  t = 4.25 min 5% B t = 4.75 min 5% B

Flow Rate: 0.5 mL/min

Injection Volume: 50 μL

MS Detection Scan Type: MRM

Polarity: Negative

Ion Source Electrospray

Analyte Transition: m/z 260.95 to 114.9

IS Transition: m/z 355.0 to 275.3

The linear standard curve of area ratio to compound 1003 concentrationwas generated using 1/x² weighting.

FIG. 1 shows that comparable levels of compound 1003 were observed inthe aqueous humor (FIG. 1a ), the vitreous (FIG. 1b ), and the cornea(FIG. 1c ) upon administration of compounds 1001 and 1002 using theprotocol described above.

Ocular pharmacokinetic parameters (for the measured compound 1003)following administration of either prodrug compound 1001 or 1002 areshown in Table 4. Peak levels of compound 1003 following administrationof compound 1001 were ˜12 mM in cornea with a half-life of ˜1 hour andin the vitreous peak levels were ˜15 nM with a slightly longer half-lifeof 1.3 hours.

TABLE 4 Aq. Humor Cornea Vitreous Compound 1001 T½ (h) 1.18 1.05 1.3 AUC(h * ng/mL) or 2756 5.53 6.61 (h * ng/mg) Cmax (ng/mL) or (ng/mg) 10553.56 4.36 Tmax (h) 0.25 0.25 0.25 Compound 1002 T½ (h) 1.3 1.17 1.35 AUC(h * ng/mL) or 3146 3.02 3.74 (h * ng/mg) Cmax (ng/mL) or (ng/mg) 13373.35 1.64 Tmax (h) 0.25 0.25 0.25

Example 2 Chemical Stability Study

The chemical stability of compounds 1001 and 1002 was measured via HPLCanalysis of the purity of these compounds over time. The purity assay ofactive components using percent area (% area) and impurities reported aspercent area (% area) were measured by HPLC using the followingconditions:

Column: ACE 3, C₁₈, 3 pin, 100×2.1 mm

Column Temperature: 35° C.

Autosampler Temperature: 5° C.

Detection: UV at 272 nm

Injection Volume: 30 μL

Flow Rate: 0.5 mL/min

Run Time: 20 minutes

Needle Wash: 100% Methanol with extended needle wash

Mobile Phase: A) Water/Trifluoroacetic acid (100/0.05 v/v), pH 3.0

-   -   B) Acetonitrile/Trifluoroacetic acid (100/0.05 v/v)

Time (min) % A % B 0 80 20 2 80 20 12 60 40 12.01 80 20 20 80 20Retention Times:

-   -   Compound 1002, 6.3 minutes    -   Compound 1001, 11.0 minutes    -   Compound 1003, 2.3 minutes

A sample diluent was prepared with water/absolute ethanol (90/10 v/v).

Reference solutions of compounds 1001 and 1002 were prepared by weighingapproximately 10 mg (±2 mg) of a 1 mg/mL stock solution of compound 1001or 1002 into a 1 mL amber volumetric flask. Approximately 0.5 mL ofsample diluent was added and the solution swirled to mix. The sample wasdiluted to volume with sample diluent and mixed well. The referencesolution for compound 1001 was stable for up to 7 days stored at 5°C.±3° C., protected from light. The reference solution for compound 1002was stable for up to 3 days stored at 5° C.±3° C., protected from light.

Ophthalmic formulations of compounds 1001 (0.994 g of a 52 mg/mLsolution in propylene glycol) or compound 1002 (1.034 g of a 50 mg/mLsolution in propylene glycol) were prepared at 500 μg/mL dose strengthin potassium phosphate buffer (25 mM, pH 5.5, 0.34 g) with 0.2 M sodiumhydroxide solution (q.s.), sodium chloride (0.327 g), poly sorbate 80(0.5% w/v), and purified water (q.s. to 100). Sample solutions ofcompounds 1001 and 1002 were each prepared by accurately weighingapproximately 20 mg of the 500 μg/mL compound formulation into a 1 mLamber volumetric flask. Approximately 0.5 mL of sample diluent was addedand the solution gently swirled to mix. The solution was diluted tovolume with sample diluent and mixed well.

The following equation was used to calculate the compound 1001 orcompound 1002 purity assay (% area) in each sample:Analogue Content(% area)=(Area of analog/Total area of all peaks≧0.10%area)×100.

Impurities≧0.10% area were integrated and reported as % area to 2decimal places.

Tables 5 and 6 show the results of the chemical stability study ofcompounds 1001 and 1002, respectively, over the course of 8 weeks at 5°C. Compound 1001 displayed better chemical stability than compound 1002,as shown by a greater percent purity over time (with less impurities).

TABLE 5 Chemical Stability of Compound 1001 % Area Compound % Area TimePoint 1001 Impurity Initial 99.55 0.45 1 week Not Tested Not Tested 2weeks 99.03 0.97 4 weeks 99.39 0.61 8 weeks 99.31 0.69

TABLE 6 Chemical Stability of Compound 1002 % Area Compound % Area TimePoint 1002 Impurity Initial 98.29 1.71 1 week 97.58 2.43 2 weeks 97.462.55 4 weeks 96.54 3.46 8 weeks 94.95 5.05

Example 3 Study of Compound 1001 in Dry Eye

The objective of this study was to compare the efficacy of compound 1001to placebo (vehicle minus active) for the treatment of the signs andsymptoms of dry eye, in a multi-center, double-masked, randomized,placebo-controlled study in which 100 human patients were equallyrandomized into one of three active treatment groups or placebo and alltreatment groups were exposed to identical humidity, temperature, andwind conditions which exacerbated the symptoms of dry eye.

During a 14 day study run-in period prior to randomization (e.g., day−14 to day 0), all patients received placebo bilaterally two times perday (BID). At the time of treatment randomization (e.g., day 0),patients were exposed to 90 minutes of identical humidity, temperature,and wind conditions which exacerbated the symptoms of dry eye afterwhich patients were stratified based on the following criterion: Centralcorneal staining post-exposure <2.5 or >3.0. Patients eligible to berandomized received one of the following treatments to be administeredas approximately a 30 μL drop to both eyes BID: 1) Compound 1001 at doseA (26.4 μg/mL) Ophthalmic Solution; 2) Compound 1001 at dose B (87.8μg/mL) Ophthalmic Solution; 3) Compound 1001 at dose C (275.6 μg/mL)Ophthalmic Solution; 4) Placebo Ophthalmic Solution (Vehicle minusactive).

Brief Summary of Visit Schedule. 5 visits over the course ofapproximately 6 weeks were scheduled as follows: Visit 1=Day −14±1 day;Visit 2=Day 0; Visit 3=Day 14±2 days; Visit 4=Day 28±2 days; Visit 5=Day29±1 hour.

The primary endpoint of mean ocular discomfort in the conditions forexacerbating the symptoms of dry eye using the ORA Ocular DiscomfortScale (during the 90 minute exposure) was summarized statistically (m,mean, standard deviation, median, min and max), and analyzed with1-sided t-tests comparing the best dose to placebo with a p-value<0.025considered significant.

At visit 4 (e.g., day 28), patients were exposed to 90 minutes ofidentical humidity, temperature, and wind conditions which exacerbatedthe symptoms of dry eye. Ocular discomfort during this exposure periodwas measured using the ORA Ocular Discomfort Scale with the oculardiscomfort score being the average of all time points during exposure.Ocular discomfort was measured again at visit 5 (e.g., day 29). Scoreson the ORA Ocular Discomfort Scale are as follows: a score of 0indicates no discomfort; a score of 1 indicates intermittent awareness;a score of 2 indicates constant awareness; a score of 3 indicatesintermittent discomfort; and a score of 4 indicates constant discomfort.

FIG. 2 shows ocular discomfort as measured on environmental day 28 aftertopical administration of vehicle or compound 1001 at doses A, B, or C.The change in ocular discomfort as compared to vehicle showedapproximately a 27% improvement when compound 1001 was administered atdose C.

FIG. 3 shows ocular discomfort as measured on environmental day 29(e.g., 24 hours after last treatment) after topical administration ofvehicle or compound 1001 at doses A, B, or C. The change in oculardiscomfort as compared to vehicle showed approximately a 36% improvementwhen compound 1001 was administered at dose C, indicating that theeffect seen upon administration of compound 1001 persists 24 hours afterthe last treatment.

Symptoms of grittiness, dryness were measured on environmental day 28 ona visual analog scale of 0-5. FIG. 4 shows a significant change in bothgrittiness and dryness, as compared to vehicle, when compound 1001 wastopically administered at dose C.

Example 4 Synthetic Protocols

All nonaqueous reactions were carried out under an atmosphere of drynitrogen. Reagents were purchased from commercial sources and used asreceived. Solvents for reactions were reagent-grade unless otherwisenoted in the text. Proton and carbon nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR)spectra were obtained on a Bruker AV-300 spectrometer at 300 MHz forproton and 75 MHz for carbon, using CDCl₃, DMSO-d₆, or CD₃OD as thesolvent. Tetramethylsilane was used as an internal reference for protonspectra and the solvent peak was used as the reference peak for carbonspectra. Mass spectra were obtained on a Finnigan LCQ Duo LC-MS ion trapelectrospray ionization (ESI) mass spectrometer. Thin-layerchromatography (TLC) was performed on Whatman No. 4500-101 silica-gelplates (250 μm layer thickness). Visualization of TLC plates wasperformed using ultraviolet light (254 nm) or iodine staining. CorningpH meter 430 apparatus was used to determine pH.

HPLC Conditions: Method A

Column: Zorbax SB-CN, 4.6×250 mm, 5 μM

Column Temp Ambient

Sample Temp Ambient

Detection: UV at 254 nm

Mobile Phase A: HPLC water with 0.1% formic acid

Mobile Phase B: HPLC acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid

Diluent: 50:50 water/acetonitrile

Flow Rate: 1 mL/min

TABLE 7 Gradient Time (min) % A % B 0 90 10 20 0 100 22 90 10 25 90 10

Synthesis of Compound 2002:

To a clean, dry, 100-L jacketed reactor equipped with a condenser, anaddition funnel, and a temperature probe was cautiously added aluminumchloride (1285 g, 9.64 mol) followed by dichloromethane (55 L). Themixture was stirred and cooled to 0-5° C. A solution of glutaricanhydride (1000 g, 8.76 mol) and bis(trimethylsilyl)acetylene (1643 g,9.64 mol) in dichloromethane (10 L) was cautiously added to the mixturedropwise while maintaining the temperature between 0 and 5° C. After theaddition was complete, the reaction mixture was stirred at roomtemperature overnight. After 12-20 h, the reaction mixture was assayedto check for the presence of glutaric anhydride by ¹H NMR (CDCl₃). Thesample was prepared for ¹H NMR analysis by adding dichloromethane (0.5mL) and 1 M HCl (0.25 mL) to a sample (0.25 mL) of the reaction mixturein a vial; the dichloromethane was separated and removed under vacuum.The residue was diluted with CDCl₃ and submitted for ¹H NMR analysis.The reaction was deemed complete when less than 3% by wt of glutaricanhydride remained. The reaction mixture was then slowly added to a 1 MHCl solution (12 L) while maintaining the temperature below 10° C. Themixture was stirred for 30-60 min until a clear solution was observed.Two phases were separated and the organic phase was washed with brine(12 L), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered over a packed bed of Celiteon a glass fritted funnel, and washed thoroughly with dichloromethane.The filtrate was concentrated under vacuum at 35-40° C. to give compound2002 (1,700 g, 91%) as a dark brown oil which was used in the next stepwithout further purification.

Synthesis of Compound 2003:

To a clean, dry, 12-L, four-neck, round-bottom flask equipped with acondenser and a temperature probe were charged crude acid 2002 (1000 g),p-TsOH.H₂O (89.5 g, 0.1 equiv), and 2-propanol (6 L). The reactionmixture was heated at 65° C. for 24 h at which point the conversion wasabout 90% by HPLC. The reaction mixture was cooled and 2-propanol wasconcentrated under vacuum at 50-55° C. The resulting residue was addedto MTBE (3 L) and washed with saturated NaHCO₃ (3×500 mL). The organiclayer was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered over a packed bed of Celite on aglass fritted funnel, and washed thoroughly with MTBE. The filtrate wasconcentrated under vacuum at 40-45° C. to give crude ester 2003 (1,160g, 96%) as a dark brown oil, which was used in the next step withoutfurther purification.

Synthesis of Compound 2005:

To a clean, nitrogen-flushed, 12-L, round-bottom flask equipped with amechanical stirrer, temperature probe, and nitrogen inlet were chargedcompound 2003 (433 g, 1.7 mol), anhydrous isopropyl alcohol (4.3 L), andcompound 2010 (20.4 g, 0.034 mol). After stirring at ambient temperaturefor 1 h, the conversion to compound 2004 was deemed complete by TLCanalysis (20% EtOAc/heptane). Ammonium chloride (109 g, 2.03 mol) wasadded followed by the streamwise addition of tetrabutylammonium fluoride(2.03 L, 1 M solution in THF). After overnight stirring, the conversionto compound 2005 was deemed complete by TLC analysis. The reactionmixture was concentrated under vacuum to approximately 1/10 of theoriginal volume and the material was partitioned between MTBE (4.3 L)and saturated aqueous ammonium chloride (2 L). Phases were separated andthe aqueous was extracted with MTBE (2 L). The combined organics werewashed with brine (2 L), dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated toa dark oil. Chromatographic purification gave compound 2005 (216 g, 70%as pure fractions and 28 g, 9% as mixed fractions) as an orange oil.

Synthesis of Compound 2007:

To a nitrogen-flushed, 2-L, three-neck, round-bottom flask were addedruthenium chloride hydrate (12 g, 0.058 mol) and absolute ethanol (0.6L) followed by p-mentha-1,5-diene (96 mL). The mixture was stirred atreflux for 4 h. The suspension was cooled, stirred at 0-5° C. for 30min, and filtered; the solids were washed with absolute ethanol (3×1 bedvolume) to yield compound 2007 (10.4 g, 58%) as a dark red solid. Thefiltrate was concentrated to 75 mL and was stored in the refrigeratorovernight. The solids were filtered and washed with absolute ethanol(3×1 bed volume) to give compound 2007 (2 g, 11%) as a dark red solid.

Synthesis of Compound 2009:

To a 2-L, three-neck, round-bottom flask equipped with a temperatureprobe, magnetic stir bar, nitrogen inlet, and addition funnel were added(1S,2S)-(−)-1,2-diphenylethylenediamine (20 g, 0.094 mol) anddichloromethane (160 mL). The mixture was cooled to 0-3° C. and a 1 Msolution of sodium hydroxide (160 mL) was added dropwise whilemaintaining the temperature below 5° C. To this mixture was added asolution of toluenesulfonyl chloride (17.9 g, 0.094 mol) indichloromethane (320 mL) dropwise over a 2-h period. The biphasicmixture was stirred at 0-5° C. for an additional 1 h and the reactionwas deemed complete by TLC (50% EtOAc/heptane, UV). Phases wereseparated and the organic phase was washed with water (2×320 mL) andbrine (320 mL), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to a crudesolid. The solid was dissolved in toluene (200 mL) at 70-80° C. andheptane (300 mL) was added portionwise while maintaining thistemperature. The resulting slurry was cooled and stirred at 20-25° C.for 1 h and then cooled and stirred at 0-5° C. for 10 min. The solidswere filtered and washed with a 50% solution of toluene in heptane (3×1bed volume) to give compound 2009 (30.24 g, 88%) as a white powder.

Synthesis of Compound 2010:

To a 1-L, nitrogen-flushed, three-neck, round-bottom flask equipped witha temperature probe, mechanical stirrer, addition funnel and nitrogeninlet were added compound 2007 (10.4 g, 0.017 mol), compound 2009 (12.5g, 0.034 mol), potassium hydroxide (14.14 g, 0.252 mol), and anhydrousdichloromethane (217 mL). This mixture was stirred at 20-25° C. for 10min and then water (217 mL) was added dropwise while maintaining thetemperature below 30° C. The resulting mixture was stirred for 15 minand the phases separated. The organic phase was washed with water (217mL), dried over sodium sulfate, and filtered. The filtrate was driedover calcium hydride (4.2 g) portionwise and the solids were filteredover Celite and washed with anhydrous dichloromethane. The filtrate wasconcentrated under vacuum to give compound 2010 (20 g, 98%) as a purplesolid.

Synthesis of Compound 2012:

A three-neck, 22-L, round-bottom flask equipped with a magnetic stirrer,a temperature probe, and an addition funnel with a nitrogen inlet wascharged with (S)-(−)-glycidol (1.0 kg, 13.5 mol) and DCM (3.0 L).Imidazole (1.01 kg, 14.8 mol) and DMAP (84 g, 680 mmol) were added andthe reaction was cooled to 0° C. A solution of TBDMSCl (2.04 kg, 13.5mol) in DCM (2.0 L) was added while maintaining the internal temperaturebelow 10° C. The reaction was stirred at 0° C. for 2 h and analyzed byTLC (9:1 heptane/EtOAc) which indicated that the reaction was complete.The reaction mixture was purified by silica-gel plug in two bathes(silica gel: 6 kg each) using DCM as eluent to afford the desiredproduct as a colorless oil (2.2 kg, 86% yield). The ¹H NMR spectrum wasconsistent with the assigned structure of compound 2012.

Synthesis of Compound 2013:

A multiple-neck, 72-L, round-bottom flask equipped with a mechanicalstirrer, a temperature probe, and an addition funnel with a nitrogeninlet was charged with THF (5.5 L). n-Hexyl lithium (2.3 M in hexane,5.3 L, 12.3 mol) was added while maintaining the internal temperaturebelow 30° C. The solution was cooled to −20° C. and TMS acetylene (1.98L, 1.2 equiv) was added at <−50° C. The reaction was stirred at <−55° C.for 1 h and a solution of compound 2012 (2.2 kg, 11.66 mol) was addedover 75 min at <−55° C., followed by the addition of BF₃.Et₂O (1.44 L,1.0 equiv) over 110 min at <−55° C. The reaction was stirred at <−60° C.for 16 h and TLC analysis (9:1 heptane/EtOAc) indicated that thereaction was complete. It was quenched with 75% saturated brine solution(11 L, 5 vol) and diluted with MTBE (11 L, 5 vol). The organic layer wasconcentrated to dryness to afford a colorless oil (3.43 kg, >100%yield). The ¹H NMR spectrum was consistent with the assigned structureof compound 2013.

Synthesis of Compound 2014:

A multiple-neck, 72-L, round-bottom flask equipped with a mechanicalstirrer, a temperature probe, and an addition funnel with a nitrogeninlet was charged with crude 2013 (3.43 kg) and DCM (6.6 L). Imidazole(1.19 kg, 17.5 mol) and DMAP (70 g, 580 mmol) were added and thereaction was cooled to 0° C. TBDPSCl (4.17 kg, 15.2 mol) was added whilemaintaining the internal temperature below 10° C. The reaction wasstirred at ambient temperature for 18 h and analyzed by TLC (9:1heptane/EtOAc) which indicated that the reaction was complete. Thereaction mixture was concentrated to dryness, diluted with heptanes (11L), and washed with water (2×11 L). The organic layer was concentratedto dryness to afford the desired product 2014 as a pale brown oil (8.21kg, >100 yield). The ¹H NMR spectrum was consistent with the assignedstructure of compound 2014.

Synthesis of Compound 2015:

A multiple-neck, 72-L, round-bottom flask equipped with a mechanicalstirrer, a temperature probe, and a nitrogen inlet was charged withcrude compound 2014 (8.21 kg, approximately 11.7 mol) and DCM (15.3 L).The reaction mixture was cooled to 0° C. and a solution of CSA (2.72 kg,11.7 mol) in MeOH (15.3 L) was added at <10° C. The reaction was stirredat 0° C. for 2 h and analyzed by TLC (9:1 heptane/EtOAc) which indicatedthat the reaction was complete. The reaction was quenched with TEA (1.18kg, 11.7 mol) and concentrated to dryness. The residue was diluted inheptanes (18.5 L) and washed with water (2×18.5 L). The organic layerwas purified by silica-gel plug in four bathes (silica gel: 5 kg each)using heptanes to eluent the impurities and 4:1 heptanes/EtOAc to eluentthe desired product. The fraction containing the product wasconcentrated to dryness to afford a pale brown oil (3.38 kg, 70% yieldover three steps). The ¹H NMR spectrum was consistent with the assignedstructure of compound 15.

Synthesis of Compound 2016:

A multiple-neck, 72-L, round-bottom flask equipped with a magneticstirrer, a temperature probe, a heating mantle, and a nitrogen inlet wascharged with compound 2015 (3.38 kg, 8.2 mol) and DCM (16 L). It wascooled to 0° C. and DMSO (1.93 L) and TEA (3.79 L) were added. SO₃.pyr(3.93 kg, 24.6 mol) was added while maintaining the internal temperaturebelow 10° C. The reaction was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h and analyzed byTLC (9:1 heptane/EtOAc) which indicated that the reaction was complete.The reaction was washed with 10% citric acid (2×5 vol) and the organiclayer was concentrated to dryness. The residue was purified in fourbatches with a silica-gel plug (silica gel: 7 kg each) using 2% EtOAc inheptanes as eluent to afford the desired product as a yellow oil (2.0kg, 59% yield). The mixed fractions were combined and concentrated todryness to afford a yellow oil (0.38 kg, 11% yield). The ¹H NMR spectrumwas consistent with the assigned structure of compound 2016.

Synthesis of Compound 2017:

A three-neck, 22-L, round-bottom flask equipped with a magnetic stirrer,a temperature probe, a heating mantle, and a nitrogen inlet was chargedwith compound 2016 (2.0 kg, contained 1.42 kg of 2017 by weight assay,3.48 mol) and ACN (7.1 L). The reaction mixture was heated to 30° C. andPh₃PCHCHO (1.38 kg, 68.6 mmol) was added in portions while maintainingthe internal temperature at <35° C. The reaction was heated at 30° C.for 15 h and analyzed by ¹H NMR which indicated that the reaction wascomplete. It was concentrated to dryness and the residue was dissolvedin DCM (0.71 mL). The resulting solution was diluted with heptanes (1.42L) and purified by silica-gel plug in two batches using 10:1heptane/EtOAc as eluent to afford the desired product as a pale yellowoil (1.87 kg, 88% yield). The ¹H NMR spectrum was consistent with theassigned structure of compound 2017.

Synthesis of Compound 2018:

A 5-L, three-neck, round-bottom flask was heated with a heat gun undervacuum (1-10 torr) three times and purged under argon. Anhydrouschromium chloride (100 g, 0.814 mol) was added and the flask was againheated under vacuum three times. Anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (1000 mL) wasadded and the resulting slurry was stirred for 2 h at ambienttemperature. The slurry gave an exotherm to about 30-35° C. during thisperiod and turned a greenish color. In a separate flask, compound 2017(57 g, 0.131 mol) was azeotroped with toluene three times. Iodoform (102g, 0.273 mol) and anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (700 mL) were added tocompound 2017 under nitrogen forming a yellow solution. The solution wasthen added to the slurry of chromium chloride by cannula under nitrogenover 30 min while maintaining the internal temperature below 5° C. After30 min, TLC showed completion of reaction. The reaction was quenchedportionwise with a mixture of sodium thiosulfate (10 wt %, 570 mL) andsaturated sodium bicarbonate (570 mL) while maintaining the temperaturebelow 15° C. MTBE (2000 mL) was added; two phases were separated and theorganic phase was washed with brine (1140 mL), dried over magnesiumsulfate, filtered, and concentrated to give crude 2018 as a greenresidue with an E/Z-ratio of 8.8:1 by ¹H NMR analysis. The crudematerial was stored in diethylamine (400 mL) in the freezer overnight.

Synthesis of Compound 2019:

A 3-L, three-neck, round-bottom flask was degassed and purged undernitrogen. To the flask was addedtetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (7.4 g, 6 mmol) and copperiodide (2.5 g, 13 mmol). A degassed solution of compound 2005 (24 g, 131mol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (55 mL) was added under nitrogen bycannula at ambient temperature. A degassed solution of compound 2018(0.131 mol) in diethylamine (400 mL) and anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (800mL) was then added under nitrogen by cannula. The reaction mixture wasallowed to stir at ambient temperature overnight. At this point thereaction was complete by HPLC analysis. The reaction was quenched withsaturated aqueous ammonium chloride (20 mL) and then concentrated to aresidue. MTBE (700 mL) was added and the mixture was slurried for 10min; the solids were filtered over a packed bed of Celite on a glassfritted funnel. The filtrate was washed with saturated aqueous ammoniumchloride (300 mL), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, andconcentrated to give 2019 (89 g, >100%) as a crude brown oil which hadan E/Z-ratio of 6.3:1 by ¹H NMR analysis which was purified by columnchromatography on silica gel followed by CombiFlash chromatography.

Synthesis of Compound 1001:

A 5-L, three-neck, round-bottom flask was charged with intermediate 2019(284.4 g, 0.46 mol), ammonium chloride (74.2 g, 1.39 mol), and THF (850mL). The mixture was stirred and cooled to 5° C. using an ice bath. Tothe stifling mixture was added 1 M tetrabutylammonium fluoride in THF(1.4 L) via an addition funnel over 15 min such that the reactiontemperature remained below 10° C. The mixture was stirred for 2 h atwhich point TLC analysis (40% ethyl acetate/heptanes) showed no startingmaterial remained. The reaction mixture was diluted with tert-butylmethyl ether (1.4 L) and saturated ammonium chloride (1.4 L) and thelayers separated. The organic layer was washed with saturated ammoniumchloride (1.4 L), dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated to affordan oil (271.4 g). The oil was suspended in 20% heptanes/ethyl acetate(200 mL) and dichloromethane was slowly added until a solution wasformed (approximately 20 mL). The mixture was purified on silica gel (2kg) eluting with 20% ethyl acetate/heptanes (16 L), 30% ethylacetate/heptanes (8 L), 40% ethyl acetate/heptanes (20 L), and 50% ethylacetate/heptanes (16 L). The pure fractions were combined andconcentrated to afford 1001 (128.3 g, 91% yield): HPLC 97.7% (AUC),t_(R)=13.3 min; the ¹H NMR spectrum was consistent with the assignedstructure of compound 1001 as is shown in FIG. 5.

Synthesis of Compound 1002:

Ta a solution of 1001 (35 g, 115 mmol) in MeOH (350 mL) was addedp-TsOH.H₂O (4.38 g, 23 mmol). The resulting solution was stirred at roomtemperature for 22 h and diluted with EtOAc (700 mL) The mixture waswashed with 5% aqueous sodium bicarbonate (3×100 mL). The combinedaqueous were extracted with EtOAc (3×200 mL). The organics were combinedand washed with brine (150 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, andconcentrated under vacuum. The oil residue was purified by columnchromatography (2:3 EtOAc/n-heptane) to give 1002 (22.8 g, 71.7%, 98.1%(AUC) by HPLC) as a light yellow oil. The ¹H NMR spectrum was consistentwith the assigned structure of compound 1002 as is shown in FIG. 6.

Synthesis of Compound Z:

A 5-L, three-neck, round-bottom flask was charged with 1001 [335 g, 1.1mol], THF (5 vol), and water (5 vol). LiOH (52.7 g, 2.2 mol) was addedand the reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 4 h and analyzedby TLC which indicated that the reaction was complete. The reactionmixture was extracted with MTBE (2×5 vol) and the aqueous layer wasadjusted to pH 4.4 using 2 N HCl (900 mL). It was extracted with MTBE(6×5 vol) and the combined organic layers were washed with water (5vol), dried over Na₂SO₄, diluted with ethanol (10 vol), and concentratedto five volumes. The resulting ethanol solution was cooled to 0° C. and6 N NaOH (1 equiv) was added. The reaction was stirred for 1 h,concentrated to dryness, and dried under vacuum for 18 h to afford abrown oil (277 g, 88% yield): HPLC 99.2% (AUC), t_(R)=10.1 min; the ¹HNMR spectrum was consistent with the assigned structure of compound Zand indicated the presence of residual ethanol. The brown oil (277 g)was dissolved in water (2 vol), concentrated to dryness at 40° C., andfurther dried under vacuum for 18 h to afford the desired productcompound Z as a brown oil (279 g): HPLC 99.0% (AUC), t_(R)=9.9 min; the¹H NMR spectrum was consistent with the assigned structure of compound Zas shown in FIG. 7.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

All publications and patents mentioned herein are hereby incorporated byreference in their entirety as if each individual publication or patentwas specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated byreference. In case of conflict, the present application, including anydefinitions herein, will control.

EQUIVALENTS

While specific embodiments of the subject invention have been discussed,the above specification is illustrative and not restrictive. Manyvariations of the invention will become apparent to those skilled in theart upon review of this specification and the claims below. The fullscope of the invention should be determined by reference to the claims,along with their full scope of equivalents, and the specification, alongwith such variations.

The invention claimed is:
 1. A pharmaceutical preparation suitable fortreating or preventing an ophthalmic condition in a human patient, saidpreparation comprising: one or more of: a compound of any of formulaeI-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, alipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound, and one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients, wherein the pharmaceuticalpreparation is characterized in that a) the one or more of a compound ofany of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound is present ina concentration over 90 micromolar, b) the pharmaceutical preparation isa solution with a pH in the range of 5.5 to 7.4, and/or c) thepharmaceutical preparation further comprises one or more surfactants. 2.The pharmaceutical preparation of claim 1, wherein the pharmaceuticalpreparation is substantially free of preservatives.
 3. Thepharmaceutical preparation of claim 1 wherein said compound of formula Ihas the structure:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: Re and Rf areindependently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl,heteroaryl, acyl, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, or silyl; E is abranched alkoxy; Rh and Ri are independently selected from hydrogen,alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl; R₅ isselected from i-iv as follows: i) CH₂CH(R₆)CH₂, where R₆ is hydrogen,alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, fluoro,hydroxyl or alkoxy; ii) CH₂C(R₆R₇)CH₂, where R₆ and R₇ are eachindependently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, aryl, or fluoro,or R₆ and R₇ are connected together to form a carbocyclic orheterocyclic ring; iii) CH₂OCH₂, CH₂C(O)CH₂, or CH₂CH₂; or iv) R₅ is acarbocyclic, heterocyclic, aryl or heteroaryl ring; and R₈ and R₉ areindependently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl,perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, aryl or heteroaryl, or R₈ and R₉ are connectedtogether to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
 4. Thepharmaceutical preparation of claim 3, wherein E is selected fromisopropoxy, isobutoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, 3-methylbutoxy,2,2-dimethylpropoxy, or 1,1,2-trimethylpropoxy.
 5. The pharmaceuticalpreparation of claim 3 or 4, wherein the compound is represented byformula II,

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 6. The pharmaceuticalpreparation of claim 5, wherein the compound is represented by formulaIII,

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 7. The pharmaceuticalpreparation of claim 1 wherein said compound is represented by formula1001,

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 8. The pharmaceuticalpreparation of claim 1, wherein the preparation is an aqueous solutionsuitable for topical administration to an eye, the solution having aconcentration of greater than 30 micrograms/milliliter of the compound.9. The pharmaceutical preparation of claim 8, having a concentrationfrom 30 micrograms/milliliter to 2000 micrograms/milliliter of thecompound.
 10. The preparation of claim 1, wherein the ophthalmiccondition is dry eye.
 11. A method of treating or preventing anophthalmic condition comprising administering a pharmaceuticalpreparation comprising: one or more of: a compound of any of formulaeI-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one of formulae 1-49, alipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound, and one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients, wherein the pharmaceuticalpreparation is characterized in that a) the one or more of a compound ofany of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound is present ina concentration over 90 micromolar, b) the pharmaceutical preparation isa solution with a pH in the range of 5.5 to 7.4, and/or c) thepharmaceutical preparation further comprises one or more surfactants


12. The method of claim 11, wherein greater than 2 micrograms of thecompound is administered to an eye per day.
 13. The method of claim 12,wherein from 2 to 175 micrograms of the compound is administered to aneye per day.
 14. The method of any of claims 11-13, wherein the compoundis administered once, twice, three times, or four times daily.
 15. Themethod of claim 11, wherein the ophthalmic condition is dry eye.
 16. Apackaged pharmaceutical for delivering eyedrops to an eye in need oftreatment for an opthalmic condition, wherein the eyedrops comprise a

a pharmaceutical preparation comprising: one or more of: a compound ofany of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound, and one ormore pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, wherein the pharmaceuticalpreparation is characterized in that a) the one or more of a compound ofany of formulae I-IX, a compound of formula A, a compound of any one offormulae 1-49, a lipoxin compound, or an oxylipin compound is present ina concentration over 90 micromolar, b) the pharmaceutical preparation isa solution with a pH in the range of 5.5 to 7.4, and/or c) thepharmaceutical preparation further comprises one or more surfactants.